2009 Cadillac Escalade/Escalade ESV Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners
Canadian Owners
(Propriétaires Canadiens)
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and the names
ESCALADE and ESV are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes
after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle.
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15911387 B Second Printing
©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
{ CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
0 : Adjustable Pedals
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
F : Traction Control
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ CAUTION:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Power Seats
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
Driver Seat with Power Seat Control, Power Recline,
and Power Lumbar shown
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
The vehicle may also be equipped with manually tilting
head restraints in the outboard seating positions.
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
side of the front seats.
The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted up
and down.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
Power Lumbar
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
The power reclining seatback control is located behind
the power seat control on the outboard side of the
Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat
settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
The controls used to operate the power lumbar feature
are located on the outboard side of the seats.
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold the
front of the control.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
rear of the control.
• To raise the height of the support, press and hold
the top of the control.
• To lower the height of the support, press and hold
the bottom of the control.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches
the desired level of support.
+ (Heated Seatback): To heat only the seatback,
press the top button with the heated seatback symbol.
Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat
settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
low and to turn the heated seatback off. Indicator bars
next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected:
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as
it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): To heat the entire
seat, press the bottom button with the heated seat and
seatback symbol.
Heated Seats
If the front seats have the
heated seat feature, the
buttons used to control this
feature are located on
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
low and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator bars next to
the symbol designate the level of heat selected: three for
high, two for medium, and one for low.
the climate control panel.
The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the
ignition is turned off. If you want to use the heated
seat feature after you restart the vehicle, you will need
to press the appropriate heated seat button again.
If your vehicle has heated and cooled seats, see Heated
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
+ (Heated Seatback): To heat only the seatback,
press the button with the heated seatback symbol.
Heated and Cooled Seats
If the front seats have the
heated and cooled seat
feature, the buttons
used to control this feature
are located on the
climate control panel.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
low and to turn the heated seatback off. Indicator bars
next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected:
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): To heat the entire
seat, press the button with the heated seat and seatback
symbol.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
low and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator bars next to
the symbol designate the level of heat selected: three for
high, two for medium, and one for low.
{ (Cooled Seat): To cool the entire seat, press the
button with the cooled seat symbol.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
low and to turn the cooled seat off. Indicator bars next to
the symbol designate the level of cooling selected: three
for high, two for medium, and one for low.
The heated and cooled seats will be canceled after the
ignition is turned off. If you want to use the heated
and cooled seat feature after you restart your vehicle,
you will need to press the appropriate seat button again.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A second seating, mirror, steering wheel position, and
throttle and brake pedal position can be programmed by
repeating the above steps and pressing button 2.
Memory Features
Your vehicle has the memory package.
The controls for this feature
are located on the driver’s
door, and are used to
program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s
seat, outside mirrors,
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in
P (Park). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The
seat, outside mirrors, steering wheel position, and
adjustable throttle and brake pedals will move to the
position previously stored. You will hear a single beep.
steering wheel position,
and the adjustable throttle
and brake pedal feature,
if your vehicle has it.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
enter your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature
is on, automatic seat, mirror, steering wheel position,
and adjustable pedal movement will occur. See
“MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, power mirror buttons, power tilt wheel control,
or adjustable pedal switch.
To save your positions in memory, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, steering
wheel, and the throttle and brake pedals to a
comfortable position.
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the
adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position, the
driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals recall may stop
working. If this happens, remove the obstruction and
press the appropriate function control for two seconds.
Then try recalling the memory position again by pressing
the appropriate memory button. If the memory position is
still not recalling, see your dealer/retailer for service.
page 2-27 for more information.
Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and recall
the mirror positions.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you know
that the position has been stored.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Exit Seat
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
door between buttons 1 and 2.
With the vehicle in P (Park), the exit position can be
recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear
a single beep. The driver’s seat will move back.
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement will
occur when the key is removed from the ignition.
See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle
Further programming for the memory seat feature can
be done using the DIC. You can select the automatic
easy exit seat feature or the remote memory seat recall
feature.
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
The controls for the power reclining seatback are
located on the outboard side of the front seats behind
the power seat control.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat
settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory Features
on page 1-7.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M (Heated Seat): To heat the seat cushion, press the
button with the heated seat symbol.
Center Seat
Your vehicle may have a front center seat. The seatback
doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage area for the
driver and passenger when the center seat is not used.
Do not use it as a seating position when the seatback is
folded down.
A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA display
to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to
cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium,
and low, and to turn it off. Indicator bars next to the
symbol will designate the level of heat selected: three for
high, two for medium, and one for low.
Rear Seats
The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the
ignition is turned off. If the vehicle is restarted, the
heated seat button will need to be pressed again to
restart the feature.
Heated Seats
The rear outboard seats
have the heated seat
feature. The buttons used
to control this feature
are located on the Rear
Seat Audio (RSA) panel.
Driver’s Side RSA
Heated Seat Button
Only shown
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60/40 Split Bench Seat
(Second Row)
If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the seat(s) can
be folded for additional cargo space or folded and
tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seats, if
your vehicle has them. These seats will have either
the manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic seat
release fold and tumble feature.
Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the
seat, to release the seatback.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lift the same lever
again to release the
rear of the seat from the
floor. The seat will
tumble forward.
The seatback will fold forward automatically.
Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat
load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front
seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the
upright position.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position
{ CAUTION:
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
3. Make sure the safety belt in the center seating
position is not caught between the two seats
and is not twisted.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and
pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the
Third Row Seats
{ CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows, if your
vehicle has them, do the following:
2. Lift the lever(s), located on the bottom rear of the
second row seat(s) on the inboard side, to release
the seatback. The seatback will fold forward.
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
3. Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the
seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward
automatically.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. From the front seats,
press one of the
Power Release Fold and Tumble
Feature
automatic seat release
buttons located on
the overhead console.
The transmission must be in (P) Park for this feature
to work.
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
{ CAUTION:
Overhead Console
Buttons shown, Panel
Button similar
Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when
someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury
to the person sitting there. Always make sure
there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing
the automatic seat release button.
When accessing the third row seats, if your vehicle
has them, from the outside of the vehicle, press
the button on the panel behind either rear door.
One press of the button automatically folds
the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
There will be a slight delay between the folding of
the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position
{ CAUTION:
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
3. Make sure that the safety belt in the center seating
position is not caught between the two seats and is
not twisted.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and
pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press the automatic
seat release button
Folding and Tumbling the Second Row
Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or
Outside
located on the panel
behind the rear doors.
{ CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.
Driver’s Side Rear Panel
Button shown
One press of the button automatically folds the
seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward. There
will be a slight delay between the folding of the
seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if
your vehicle has them, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Bucket Seats (Second Row)
If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbacks can be
reclined, the seats can be folded for additional cargo
space, or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to
the third row seats, if your vehicle has them. These
seats will have either the manual fold and tumble feature
or the automatic seat release fold and tumble feature.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1. Lift the lever located on the outboard side of
the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding a
rear seat.
The seatback will fold forward. Leaving the seatback
in this position creates a flat load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front
seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the
upright position.
2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the
seat, to release the seatback.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lift the lever again to
release the rear of the
seat from the floor.
The seat will tumble
forward.
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and
pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Lift the lever, located
on the bottom rear of
the second row seat on
the inboard side, to
release the seatback.
The seatback will
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the
Third Row Seats
{ CAUTION:
fold forward.
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.
3. Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat
from the floor. The seat will tumble forward.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if
your vehicle has them:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. From the front seats,
press one of the
Power Release Fold and Tumble
Feature
automatic seat release
buttons located on
the overhead console.
The transmission must be in (P) Park for this feature
to work.
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
{ CAUTION:
Overhead Console
Buttons shown
Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when
someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury
to the person sitting there. Always make sure
there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing
the automatic seat release button.
When accessing the third row seats, if your vehicle
has them, from the outside of the vehicle, press
the button on the panel behind either rear door.
One press of the button automatically folds
the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
There will be a slight delay between the folding of
the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position
{ CAUTION:
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and
pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press the automatic
seat release button
Folding and Tumbling the Second Row
Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or
Outside
located on the panel
behind the rear doors.
{ CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could
cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to
return the seat to the passenger seating position.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.
Driver’s Side Rear Panel
Button shown
One press of the button automatically folds the
seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward. There
will be a slight delay between the folding of the
seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if
your vehicle has them, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lift the release lever,
located on the bottom
rear of the seatback
Third Row Seat
If the vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback(s) can
be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled, or
removed from the vehicle.
on the outboard side of
the seat, and the
seatback will fold forward.
Folding the Seatback(s)
To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
2. Remove all items on the seat cushion.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unfolding the Seatback(s)
Tumbling the Third Row Seat
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the
following:
The seat can be tumbled forward for additional cargo
space.
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
To tumble the seat, do the following:
2. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the
upright position.
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
2. Make sure the head rests are completely lowered,
there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat.
3. Fold the seatbacks forward using the instructions
previously listed under “Folding the Seatbacks”.
You will not be able to unlatch the seat from
the floor unless the seatback is folded down.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
4. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by lifting the
lever located next
to the carrying handle
on the rear of the
seat near the bottom.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place.
7. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked.
{ CAUTION:
Put the seat in this position only when necessary for
additional cargo space.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
Returning the Third Row Seat from a
Tumbled Position
To return the seat to the normal seating position, do the
following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2. Make sure there is nothing that could become
trapped under the seat.
3. Release the seat from the tumbled position by lifting
the lever located next to the carrying handle at the
bottom rear of the seat.
4. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright
position.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Third Row Seat
Installing the Third Row Seat
To remove the seat, do the following:
To install the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions
listed under “Folding the Seatbacks” previously.
The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback is
folded.
2. Slide the front outboard seat wheels into the track on
the floor and roll the seat forward. The front latches
should lock into place. If the latches do not lock, try
tilting the rear of the seat upward slightly.
3. Lower the rear of the seat and push down on the
seat to engage the rear floor latches.
3. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling the
carrying handle,
located at the rear of
the seat, rearward.
{ CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the
seat into place properly when installing it.
4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle. There is a track in
the floor to guide the seat wheels out of the vehicle.
5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright
position.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
7. Make sure the safety belts are returned to the
original position over the seatbacks.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
belt except for the center front passenger position, if
page 1-50 for more information.
The lap-shoulder belts for the first and second row
seating positions are equipped with free-falling latch
plates. If the vehicle has a third row, the lap-shoulder
belts have either free-falling or cinching latch plates.
Use the following pictures to determine the latch
plate style:
Cinching Latch Plate
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across
you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt with a
free-falling latch plate is pulled out all the way, the
child restraint locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Free-Falling Latch Plate
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-87 for more information.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, for
lap-shoulder belts with cinching latch plates, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling the safety belt until
it can be buckled.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the
safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger positions.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal,
near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle has
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the height
adjuster and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
The adjuster can be moved up just by pushing up on
the shoulder belt guide.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into position.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away
from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the second row seat and the third row, if the vehicle
has one. Here is how to install a comfort guide to the
safety belt:
Third Row
If your vehicle has a third row, remove the guide
from its storage pocket on the side of the seat.
Second Row
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the interior body.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage
clip on the interior body or storage pocket on the
side of the seat.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Lap Belt
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
You vehicle may have a center seating position.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-51.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
length of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{ CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{ CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the
law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them. Every time
infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by appropriate child
restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
additional information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
{ CAUTION:
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
attached using only the top tether and anchor.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for
use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Second Row — Bucket
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors. There is
one top tether anchor that
can be used for either the
third row center or driver
side seating position but
not both at the same time.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Third Row — Three
Passenger
Second Row — 60/40
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For models with a three passenger third row seat, see
the information following for installing a child restraint
with a top tether in the third row, if your vehicle has one.
Never install two top tethers using the same top
tether anchor.
For models with 60/40 second row seating, the rear
right side passenger and center seating positions have
exposed metal anchors located in the crease between
the seatback and the seat cushion.
For models with second row bucket seats, both rear
seating positions have exposed metal anchors located
in the crease between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
Second Row Seat — Bucket
For models with bucket second row seating, the top
tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat
cushion for each seating position in the second row.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Second Row Seat — 60/40
Third Row Seat — Three Passenger
For models with 60/40 second row seating, the top
tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat
cushion for each seating position in the second row.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat,
there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear
of the seat cushion that can be used for either the
third row center or driver side seating position. Never
install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-61 for additional information.
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle has
one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
dual tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with the child restraint to
make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-63
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
tether anchor locations.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in
the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle’s lap-shoulder belts for the first and second
row seating positions are equipped with free-falling latch
plates. If the vehicle has a third row, the lap-shoulder
belts have either free-falling or cinching latch plates.
Use the following pictures to determine the latch
plate style:
Cinching Latch Plate
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Free-Falling Latch Plate
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For third row seating positions, with cinching latch
plates, tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. For passenger seating positions with a lap-shoulder
belt and a free-falling latch plate, pull the rest of the
shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock. When installing a child restraint using
a lap-shoulder belt and a cinching latch plate,
skip Step 4 and proceed to Step 5.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
information.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
{ CAUTION:
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
1-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
CAUTION: (Continued)
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
including important safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
additional information.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-63
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
locations.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
page 3-37.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
The vehicle may have the following airbags:
• If your vehicle has a third row seat, it will have third
row roof-rail airbags.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
page 1-87 for more information.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
1-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
1-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
{ CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
Where Are the Airbags?
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags and a third row
passenger seat, the airbags are located in the ceiling
above the rear windows for the outboard passenger
positions in the third row.
1-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
seat. The seat position sensor provides information
that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at
a reduced level or at full deployment.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
Your vehicle has roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System
on page 1-79. Roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover
or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
1-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear
impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either
side of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing system
predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in
a severe frontal impact.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard
seating positions in the first, second, and third rows, if
equipped with a third row seat. The rollover capable
roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no
system can prevent all such ejections.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the
airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
page 1-84 for more information.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side windows that have
occupant seating positions.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{ CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the overhead console
when the vehicle is started.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, or
the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and the roof-rail airbags (if equipped)
are not affected by the passenger sensing system.
1-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
1-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is present in a
child restraint.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
1-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-2.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn
off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending
upon the child’s seating posture and body build. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat.
If this is not desired remove the object from the seat.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
modifications that can affect how the system operates.
1-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 8-15.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
1-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
could also interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
If you have any questions, call Customer
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, rollover sensor
module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system.
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric,
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
1-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-36 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
{ CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and door locks.
See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or
additional key is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
information.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range, try this:
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy
weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following functions may be available if this vehicle
has the RKE system:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking
has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn
chirps when Q is pressed again within three seconds.
additional information.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Pressing Q arms the content theft-deterrent system.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver door.
If K is pressed again within three seconds, all
remaining doors unlock. The interior lamps may come
on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition
is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the turn signal lamps flash
twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC
the DIC, the exterior lights turn on briefly if it is dark
enough outside. See “APPROACH LIGHTING” under
With Remote Start and
Power Liftgate and
Liftglass (Without
Remote Start Similar)
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
transmitter will have a number on top of it, “1” or “2”.
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1
will be recalled when using the transmitter labeled “1”, if
for more information.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
page 2-21.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press / to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
& (Power Liftgate): Press and hold to open and
close the liftgate. The taillamps flash and a chime
sounds to indicate when the liftgate is opening and
closing.
Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter
is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to eight
transmitters programmed to it. See “Relearn Remote
instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to the
vehicle.
m (Liftglass): Press and hold to open the liftglass.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to activate
the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn
sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm turns off
when the ignition is moved to ON/RUN or L is pressed
again. The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the panic
alarm to work.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch, located above the
metal base.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
Remote Vehicle Start
This feature allows you to start the engine from outside of
the vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s heating or
air conditioning systems and rear window defogger.
Normal operation of the system will return after the key
is turned to the ON/RUN position.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
information.
During a remote start, the climate control system will
default to a heating or cooling mode depending on the
outside temperatures.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an automatic
climate control system and heated seats, the heated
seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and
will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. If your
vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, during remote start, you will need to manually
page 1-5 for additional information.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button. The
vehicle’s doors will lock. Immediately press and hold
the transmitter’s remote start button until the turn
signal lights flash. If you cannot see the vehicle’s
lights, press and hold the remote start button for two
to four seconds. Pressing the remote start button
again after the vehicle has started will turn the
engine off.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using the remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is
still running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.
The additional ten minutes are considered a second
remote vehicle start.
After your vehicles engine has been started two times
using the remote vehicle start button, or a single remote
start with one time extension, the vehicle must be
started with the key.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
After the key is removed from the ignition, the vehicle
can be remote started again.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in
the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an
emission control system malfunction and the check
engine light comes on.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the
oil pressure gets low.
The vehicle can be remote started two separate times
between driving sequences. The engine will run for
10 minutes after each remote start.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start
system enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
information.
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time
frame, and before the engine stops.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the key in the driver’s door.
Door Locks
From the inside, use the power door locks or manual
door locks. To lock or unlock the door with the manual
locks, push down or pull up on the manual lock knob.
{ CAUTION:
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
located on the front doors.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked, the handle will not open
it. The chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are
not locked. So, all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the doors should be
locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch
and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear
three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature
is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear doors must be open to access them.
The label showing lock and unlock positions is
located near the lock.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
To set the locks, do the following:
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable
you to program the vehicle’s power door locks. You can
program this feature through the Driver Information
page 3-65 for more information on DIC programming.
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Rear Door Security Locks
1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock,
using the power door lock switch, or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle
has one.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security locks
are located on the inside
edge of each rear door.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
Liftgate/Liftglass
This feature protects you from locking the key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door
is open.
{ CAUTION:
If the driver’s side power door lock switch is pressed
when the driver’s door is open and the key is in the
ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver’s
door will unlock.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftglass or
liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas
can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death.
If the passenger’s side power door lock switch is pressed
when the front passenger’s door is open and the key is in
the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the front
passenger’s door will unlock.
If you must drive with the liftglass or liftgate open, or
if electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
liftglass or liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system
to its highest speed with the recirculation mode
off. That will force outside air into your vehicle.
page 3-27.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on how to use the power liftgate.
To open the entire liftgate, press the power liftgate
release button on the RKE or in the vehicle. See Power
on the underside of the liftgate handle (B). The liftgate
will open after a slight delay. The vehicle must be in
PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To close the liftgate, use
the pull cup or pull strap as an aid.
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch or
press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter twice. See Remote Keyless
The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if the rear
wipers are in motion. Attempting to open the liftgate or
liftglass while the rear wipers are in motion will cause the
release of the liftglass or liftgate to delay until the wipers
are parked off the liftglass.
Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the
liftglass and liftgate will not open. The liftglass and liftgate
will resume operation when the battery is reconnected
and charged.
If the battery is properly connected and has adequate
voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass still will not function,
your vehicle should be taken to a dealership for service.
On vehicles with a liftglass, press the button on the
underside of the license pocket applique (A) to open it.
The liftglass can also be opened by pressing the
liftglass release button on the RKE.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On vehicles with a power liftgate the button is located
on the overhead console.
Power Liftgate
Power Liftgate Operation
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to use the power
liftgate feature.
& : Press the top of the button to open or close the
power liftgate.
{ CAUTION:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
OFF: Press the bottom of the button for manual
operation of the power liftgate.
The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound when the
power liftgate is moving.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
You or others could be injured if caught in the
path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no
one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and
closing.
Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking
for overhead obstructions such as a garage door,
you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the area above and
behind the liftgate is clear before opening it.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in
the following ways:
• Press and hold the power liftgate button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter until
the liftgate starts moving. Remote Keyless Entry
information.
If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support
struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a chime
will sound. The liftgate will stay open temporarily, then
slowly close. See your dealer/retailer for service before
using the liftgate.
Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open
or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and the liftgate
will automatically reverse direction to the full closed or
open position. After removing the obstruction, the power
liftgate operation can be used again. If the liftgate
encounters multiple obstacles on the same power cycle,
the power function will deactivate, and you must manually
open or close the liftgate. The REAR ACCESS OPEN
warning message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
will indicate that the liftgate is open. After removing the
obstructions, manually open the liftgate to the full open
position or close the liftgate to the fully closed and latched
position. The liftgate will now resume normal power
operation.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the overhead
console.
• Pressing the touchpad switch on the outside liftgate
handle.
Pressing the buttons, or touchpad switch a second time
while the liftgate is moving reverses the direction.
l : The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the
power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch.
Press the button a second time during liftgate operation
to reverse that operation.
The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under
extreme temperatures, or under low battery conditions.
If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually.
Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the side edges
of the liftgate. If an object is caught between the liftgate
and the body and presses against this sensor, the liftgate
will reverse direction and open fully. The liftgate will
remain open until it is activated again or closed manually.
Do not force the liftgate open or closed during a power
cycle.
If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while the
power function is in progress, the liftgate power function
will continue to completion. If you shift the transmission
out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power liftgate
latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the open
position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always make
sure the power liftgate is closed and latched before you
drive away.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation of Power Liftgate
Power Assist Steps
To change the liftgate to manual operation, press the
switch on the overhead console to the OFF position.
Your vehicle may have power assist steps.
The power assist steps automatically extend from
beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door has
been opened. Once the door is closed, the assist steps
automatically move back under the vehicle after a brief
delay. The vehicle must not be moving for the assist
steps to extend or retract.
With the power liftgate disabled and all of the doors
unlocked, the liftgate can be manually opened and
closed.
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle
on the outside of the liftgate, and lift the gate open.
To close the liftgate, use the pull cup to lower the liftgate
and close. The liftgate latch will power close. Always
close the liftgate before driving.
The switch used to disable
the power assist steps is
located on the center
console below the climate
control system.
If the RKE button or the power close button on the liftgate
is pressed while power operation is disabled, the lights
will flash three times, but the liftgate will not move.
It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate
open, however, if you must drive with the liftgate open,
the liftgate should be set to manual operation by
pressing the OFF switch on the center console.
The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is
disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery
is reconnected and charged.
The assist steps cannot be disabled in the extended
position.
If the battery is properly connected with adequate
voltage, the switch is not disabled, and the liftgate still will
not function, your vehicle should be taken to a dealer/
retailer for service.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power window
switches are located on
the driver door.
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.
The front power window switch operates with two
positions for both up and down movement and the rear
power window switch operates with one position for up
and two positions for down movement. Press the switch
to the first position to lower the window to the desired
level. Pull the switch up to raise the window.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that
allows you to use the power windows once the ignition
has been turned off. For more information, see Retained
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down/Up Windows
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
Windows with the express feature allow the windows
to be raised and lowered all the way without holding the
switch.
{ CAUTION:
Press or pull the switch fully and release it to activate
the express feature.
If express override is activated, the window will not
reverse automatically. You or others could be
injured and the window could be damaged. Before
you use express override, make sure that all people
and obstructions are clear of the window path.
The express mode can be canceled at any time by
briefly pressing or pulling the switch.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause
the window to auto-reverse. The window will return to
normal operation once the obstruction or condition is
removed.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming the Power Windows
Window Lockout
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout button
is located on the driver door near the window switches.
Press the right side of the button to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows still can
be raised or lowered using the driver window switches
when the lockout feature is active.
To program each front window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button
again. The light on the button will go out.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
Sun Visors
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
fully closed.
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun
visor from the center mount and slide it along the rod from
side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger side of the
front window. Swing the sun visor to the side to cover
the side window. It can be moved along the rod from
side-to-side in this position also.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely
closed.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other windows.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the
driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pull the sun visor
down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
If a locked door is opened without using the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The
horn will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not
placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door is
not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will
go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn
will sound for about 30 seconds, then will turn off to save
the battery power.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system.
This is the security light.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door lock.
It activates only if you use the power door lock switch with
the door open or the RKE transmitter. You should also
remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct
ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
To arm the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the power door lock switch. The
security light will come on to inform the driver the
system is arming. If a door is open when the doors
are locked, the security light will flash.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the
alarm if it is armed.
If the delayed locking feature is turned on, the
theft-deterrent system will not start the arming
process until the last door is closed and the delay
page 2-10.
If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on the
RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and turn it
to START to turn off the alarm. The alarm will not stop if
you try to unlock a door any other way.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the RKE transmitter.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch will
not work.
1. This device may not cause interference.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do
not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine does not start and the security light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to
have a new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or
do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START from
the LOCK/OFF position.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut exactly
as the ignition key that operates the system.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
To program the new additional key:
New Vehicle Break-In
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
The security light will turn off once the key has been
programmed.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
capabilities of the vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets things like the
radio and the windshield wipers operate while the
engine is off. Use this position if the vehicle must be
pushed or towed.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running.
The transmission is also unlocked in this position
on automatic transmission vehicles.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must
be applied.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be
drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It may
also lock the steering wheel and automatic transmission.
The key can be removed in LOCK/OFF.
D (START): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
The steering may bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
If this doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Procedure
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as the engine
gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• OnStar® System (if equipped)
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
position.
• Sunroof (if equipped)
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof
continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door
is opened. The radio continues to work for up to
10 minutes or until the driver door is opened.
Starting the Engine
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the engine when the vehicle is are already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START
for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
up and lubricates all moving parts.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
The vehicle has adjustable throttle and brake pedals
that allow you change their positions.
The feature will not operate when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse) or while using the cruise control.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the
center console below the climate control system.
Press the right and left arrows to move the pedals either
closer or further from your body.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to
confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving,
make only small adjustments.
The vehicle has a memory function which allows the
pedal positions to be saved and recalled. See Memory
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{ CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (− 18°C). Vehicles
with an engine heater should be plugged in at least
four hours before starting. An internal thermostat in
the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above
0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a
properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, near the power steering fluid
reservoir.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When parked on a hill, especially when the vehicle has
a heavy load, you may notice an increase in the effort to
shift out of P (Park). See Torque Lock (Automatic
more information.
Automatic Transmission Operation
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
The vehicle has a Hydra-Matic® 6L80 automatic
transmission, and has an electronic shift position
indicator within the instrument panel cluster.
The electronic shift position indicator displays
when the shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice,
or sand without damaging the transmission, see If Your
page 5-31.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not connect
with the wheels. To restart when you are already moving,
use N (Neutral) only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the
vehicle is being towed.
By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the next gear
and has more power.
D (Drive) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving.
You may want to shift the transmission to a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M (Manual Mode): This position lets drivers select the
range of gears appropriate for current driving conditions.
See Driver Shift Control (DSC) later in this section.
The vehicle’s transmission uses adaptive shift controls
that compares key shift parameters to pre-programmed
ideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer.
The transmission constantly makes adjustments to
improve vehicle performance according to how the
vehicle is being used, such as with a heavy load or when
temperature changes. During this adaptive shift controls
process, shifting may feel different as the transmission
determines the best settings.
When temperatures are very cold, the Hydra-Matic®
6L80 automatic transmission’s gear shifting may
be delayed providing more stable shifts until the engine
warms up. Shifts may be more noticeable with a cold
transmission. This difference in shifting is normal.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts
the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions
in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts. This shift
stabilization feature is designed to determine, before
making an upshift, if the engine will be able to maintain
vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed,
throttle position and vehicle load. If the shift stabilization
feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be
maintained, the transmission does not upshift and instead
holds the current gear. In some cases, this may appear to
be a delayed shift, however the transmission is operating
normally.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use this feature, do the following:
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
1. Move the shift lever to the M (Manual Mode).
2. Press the plus/minus button, to upshift or downshift
selecting the desired range of gears for current
driving conditions.
The DIC display will show the message MANUAL SHIFT
on the first line and the current gear will be displayed on
for more information. The number displayed in the DIC is
the highest gear that can be used. However, the vehicle
can automatically shift to lower gears as it adjusts to
driving conditions. This means that all gears below
that number are available. When 5 (Fifth ) is selected,
1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are automatically shifted
by the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until the
plus/minus button located on the steering column lever
is used to change to the gear.
The vehicle has Driver Shift Control (DSC). DSC
controls the vehicle’s transmission and vehicle speed
while driving down hill or towing a trailer by allowing you
to select a desired range of gears.
Grade Braking is not available when the Driver Shift
more information.
While using the DSC, cruise control and the tow/haul
mode can be used.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tow/haul mode works with the Autoride® feature, if
the vehicle has this, to enhance the ride when trailering or
Tow/Haul Mode
Grade Braking
The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by
pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever.
While in Range Selection Mode, Grade Braking is
deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range
of gears.
Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/Haul Mode is
selected and you are not in the Range Selection Mode.
See “Tow/Haul Mode listed previously and Automatic
information on the Range Selection Mode. Grade Braking
assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when
driving on downhill grades by automatically implementing
a shift schedule that utilizes the engine and transmission
to slow the vehicle. This reduces wear on the braking
system and increases control of the vehicle. Grade
Braking monitors vehicle speed, acceleration, engine
torque and brake pedal usage. Using this information, it
detects when the vehicle is on a downhill grade and the
driver desires to slow the vehicle by pressing the brake.
The vehicle has a tow/haul mode. The tow/haul mode
adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift
cycling, providing increased performance, vehicle control,
and transmission cooling when towing or hauling heavy
loads.
Press the button located on the end of the shift lever to
turn the tow/haul on or off. When the tow/haul is on,
a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on.
information.
information.
page 5-44 for more information.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Grade Braking
Parking Brake
Cruise Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill
grade. It maintains vehicle speed by automatically
implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine and
the transmission to slow the vehicle. Cruise Grade
Braking operates while Cruise Control is engaged in
Tow/Haul mode to assist in maintaining vehicle speed
under loaded vehicle conditions. It utilizes vehicle
acceleration and deviation from desired speed to
determine the correct gear for the operating condition.
If vehicle speed is above the desired speed the
transmission will downshift to slow the vehicle.
If vehicle speed is near or below desired speed the
trans will upshift, allowing vehicle speed to increase.
While in the Range Select Mode (RSM) mode, cruise
grade braking is not available.
For vehicles with a release handle, set the parking
brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then
pushing down the parking brake pedal.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving
at least 5 mph (8 km/h).
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of the lever with
the parking brake symbol, located above the parking
brake pedal.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light goes off.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
page 3-39.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down, then push down momentarily on the parking
brake pedal until you feel the pedal release. Slowly
pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If the parking
brake is not released when you begin to drive, the
brake system warning light will flash and a chime will
sound warning you that the parking brake is still on.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
For vehicles without a release handle, set the parking
brake by holding the regular brake pedal down,
then pushing down the parking brake pedal.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
page 5-44.
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set. After the shift lever is moved into
P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see
if you can move the shift lever away from P (Park)
without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position by
pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up
as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle can put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. It might be difficult to pull the shift lever out
of P (Park). This is called torque lock. To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park)
properly before you leave the driver seat. To find out how,
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before releasing the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you might need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission. Then
you should be able to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever all the way into P (Park).
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have the
vehicle serviced soon.
Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts
under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park over
papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
Engine Exhaust
completely down.
{ CAUTION:
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an
enclosed area such as a garage or a building that
has no fresh air ventilation.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle
when the engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Mirrors
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for
a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to
avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the tab
forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power foldaway mirrors are
located on the driver door
armrest.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
This vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with OnStar®. It may also have
Intellibeam®. For more information on Intellibeam™, see
“Intellibeam™ Intelligent High-Beam Headlamp Control
page 2-52.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and
the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is
started.
Mirror Adjustment
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on
or off.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
Park Tilt Mirrors
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
If the vehicle has the memory package, the passenger
and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position when
the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature lets the driver
view the curb when parallel parking. The mirror(s) return
to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of
R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned off or to OFF/LOCK.
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds.
Turn this feature on or off through the Driver Information
page 3-65 for more information.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror
controls to reset them to their normal position. A popping
noise may be heard during the resetting of the power
foldaway mirrors. This sound is normal after a manual
folding operation.
Outside Convex Mirror
Automatic Dimming
{ CAUTION:
Adjust the driver outside mirror for the glare of the
headlamps behind your vehicle. See Automatic Dimming
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
Turn Signal Indicator
The vehicle has a turn signal indicator on the mirror.
An arrow on the mirror flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Heated Mirrors
{ CAUTION:
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors.
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
information.
Object Detection Systems
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the
vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure
to look for objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors.
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it operates at speeds less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), and assists the driver with parking and avoiding
objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on the rear
bumper are used to detect the distance to an object up to
8 feet (2.5 m) behind the vehicle, and at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The display is located near
the passenger side rear
window and can be seen
by looking over your right
shoulder.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 40 inches (1 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur continuously when the vehicle
is at 23 inches (0.6 m) or closer to an object.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object:
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
English
8 ft
40 in
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
amber/amber/red lights
and continuous beeping
for five seconds
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and continuous
beeping for five seconds
23 in
1 ft
0.6 m
0.3 m
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly
illuminates to indicate the system is working.
The system can be
disabled by pressing the
rear park aid disable button
located next to the radio.
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
If the vehicle is above this speed, the red light on the rear
display will flash.
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below liftgate level. Objects
must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from the rear bumper.
This distance may be less during warmer or humid
weather.
The indicator light will come on and PARK ASSIST OFF
displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
indicate that URPA is off, see DIC Warnings and
the message.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
The vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system. Read this entire section before using the system.
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be
displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on
the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions:
The SBZA system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• The driver disables the system.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
• A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of the liftgate during the
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in the
rear display. Once the attached object is removed,
URPA will return to normal operation.
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
• A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m peak (0.25V/m
average) at a distance of 3m
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV
interference caused by unauthorized modifications to
this equipment. Such modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
{ CAUTION:
SBZA is only a lane changing aid and does not
replace driver vision. SBZA does not detect:
• Vehicles outside the side blind zones which
may be rapidly approaching.
• Pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Failure to use proper care when changing lanes
may result in damage to the vehicle, injury, or
death. Always check the outside and rearview
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the
turn signal before changing lanes.
SBZA Detection Zones
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately one
lane over from both sides of the vehicle, 11 ft. or 3.5 m.
This zone starts at each side mirror and goes back
approximately 16 ft. (5.0 m). The height of the zone is
approximately between 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) and 6 ft. (2.0 m) off
the ground.
When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone,
amber SBZA displays light up in the side mirrors. This
indicates that it may be unsafe to change lanes. Before
making a lane change, always check the SBZA display,
check the outside and rearview mirrors, look over your
shoulder for vehicles and hazards, and use the turn
signal.
Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer,
as the SBZA detection zones do not change when a
trailer is towed.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SBZA can be disabled through the Driver Information
page 3-47 for more information. If the SBZA is disabled
by the driver, the SBZA mirror displays will not light up
during normal driving.
How the System Works
When the System Does Not Seem To Work
Properly
Occasional missed alerts can occur under normal
circumstances and will increase in wet conditions.
The system does not need to be serviced due to an
occasional missed alert. The number of missed alerts
will increase with increased rainfall or road spray.
Left Side Mirror Display
Right Side Mirror
Display
When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays
will briefly come on to indicate that the system is
operating. When the vehicle is moving forward, the left or
right side mirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle is
detected in that blind zone. If the turn signal is activated
and a vehicle is also detected on the same side, the
SBZA display will flash to give you extra warning not to
change lanes.
If the SBZA displays do not light up when the system is
on and vehicles are in the blind zone, the system may
need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer.
SBZA is designed to ignore stationary objects; however,
the system may occasionally light up due to guard rails,
signs, trees, shrubs, and other stationary objects. This is
normal system operation, the vehicle does not need
service.
SBZA displays do not come on while the vehicle is
approaching or passing other vehicles. At speeds greater
then 20 mph (32 km/h), SBZA displays may come on
when a vehicle you have passed remains in or drops
back into the detection zone.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SBZA does not operate when the left or right corners
of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow,
ice, slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning
If the DIC still displays the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE message after cleaning the bumper, see
your dealer/retailer.
SBZA Error Messages
The following messages may appear in the DIC:
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF: This
message indicates that the driver has turned the
system off.
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE: This
message indicates that the SBZA system is disabled
either because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in your blind zone, or the vehicle is passing
through an open field of view area, such as the desert,
where there is insufficient data for operation. The sensor
may be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, slush, or even
heavy rainstorms. This message may also activate during
heavy rain or due to road spray. The vehicle does not
page 6-100.
The SBZA displays may remain on if a trailer is attached
to the vehicle, or a bicycle or object is extending out
to either side of the vehicle.
When SBZA is disabled for any reason other than the
driver turning it off, the driver will not be able to turn SBZA
back on using the DIC. The SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
ON option will not be selectable if the conditions for
normal system operation are not met. Until normal
operating conditions for SBZA are met, you should not
rely upon SBZA while driving.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM: If this
message appears, both SBZA displays will remain on
indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system.
If these displays remain on after continued driving, the
system needs service. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
This vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system.
Read this entire section before using it.
The rear vision camera system is designed to help the
driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area
behind the vehicle. When the driver shifts the vehicle
into R (Reverse), the video image automatically appears
on the navigation screen. Once the driver shifts out of
R (Reverse), the navigation screen will go back to the
last screen that had been displayed, after a delay.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera System
On or Off
To turn the rear vision camera system on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
4. Select the Video screen button. When the Video
screen button is highlighted the RVC system is on.
2. Press the CONFIG hard key to enter the configure
menu options, then press the CONFIG hard key to
select Display or touch the Display screen button.
The delay that is received after shifting out of
R (Reverse) is approximately 10 seconds. The delay
can be cancelled by performing one of the following:
3. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button.
The Rear Camera Options screen will display.
• Pressing a hard key on the navigation system.
• Shifting in to P (Park).
• Reach a vehicle speed of 7 mph (11 km/h).
There is a message on the rear vision camera screen
that states “Check Surroundings for Safety”.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The symbols appear when an object has been detected
by the URPA system. The symbol may cover the
object when viewing the navigation screen.
Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of
the Screen
To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen, press
the CONFIG hard key while the rear vision camera image
is on the display. Any adjustments made will only affect
the rear vision camera screen.
To turn the symbols on or off:
1. Make sure that URPA has not been disabled.
2. Shift into P (Park).
3. Press the CONFIG hard key to enter the configure
menu options, then press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until Display is selected or touch
the Display screen button.
] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen
buttons to increase or decrease the brightness of the
screen.
_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen
buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the
screen.
4. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button.
The Rear Camera Options screen will display.
5. Touch the Symbols screen button. The screen
button will be highlighted when on.
Symbols
The navigation system may have a feature that lets the
driver view symbols on the navigation screen while using
the rear vision camera. The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
(URPA) system must not be disabled to use the caution
symbols. If URPA has been disabled and the symbols
have been turned on, the Rear Parking Assist Symbols
Unavailable error message may display. See Ultrasonic
Rear Vision Camera Error Messages
Service Rear Vision Camera System: This message
can display when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other vehicle systems.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Vision Camera System Unavailable: Displays
when the system is not receiving information it requires
from other vehicle systems.
Rear Vision Camera Location
If any other problem occurs or if a problem persists, see
your dealer/retailer.
{ CAUTION:
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does not
replace driver vision. RVC does not:
• Detect objects that are outside the camera’s
field of view, below the bumper, or
underneath the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the rear
vision camera screen, or use the screen during
longer, higher speed backing maneuvers or where
there could be cross-traffic. Your judged distances
using the screen will differ from actual distances.
The image is provided by the camera located above the
license plate.
The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen differs from the actual
distance. The area displayed by the camera is limited.
The camera does not display objects which are close
to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper.
The area displayed on the screen can vary according to
vehicle orientation or road conditions.
So if you do not use proper care before backing up,
you could hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist,
or pet, resulting in vehicle damage, injury, or death.
Even though the vehicle has the RVC system,
always check carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around the vehicle.
The following illustration shows the field of view that the
camera provides.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the System Does Not Seem To
Work Properly
The rear vision camera system might not work properly
or display a clear image if:
• The RVC is turned off. See “Turning the Rear
Camera System On or Off” earlier in this section.
• It is dark.
• The sun or the beam of headlights is shining
directly into the camera lens.
• Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the
camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water,
and wipe it with a soft cloth.
• The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the
position and mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can be affected. Be sure
to have the camera and its position and mounting
angle checked at your dealer/retailer.
• There are extreme temperature changes.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber glove
box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan is
not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is
available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to
have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into the
vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid Minute
Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.
To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, or
speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-Free
Calling that uses minutes to access location-based
weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. Press
the phone button and give a few simple voice commands
to browse through the various topics. See the OnStar
Owner’s Guide for more information. This feature is
only available in the continental U.S.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or
at all times.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling. See
information.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
How OnStar Service Works
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is
red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press
the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all services have been
deactivated. Press the OnStar button to confirm that the
OnStar equipment is active.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote
System
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener that
does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes
any garage door opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles, as well as, for future programming.
Only the original remote control transmitter is needed for
Fixed Code programming. The programmed buttons
should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease
ends. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons”
later in this section.
To program up to three devices:
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is
being programmed.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device, or home
automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5, choosing a
different function button in Step 3 than what was used for
the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door opener
is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the Programming
instructions that follow for a Fixed Code garage door
opener.
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this button.
After pressing this button, complete the following
steps in less than 30 seconds.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door moves.
The indicator light, above the selected button, should
slowly blink. This button may need to be held for up
to 20 seconds.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if the
dip switch settings are different, use the dip switch
settings on the motor head unit to program the
Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip switch
settings can also be used when the original hand
held transmitter is not available.
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
garage door opener motor. If there are a row of dip
switches similar to the graphic above, the garage
door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do not
see a row of dip switches, return to the previous
section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
Your hand held transmitter can have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 2, in
order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 4.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to control
the garage door until the garage door moves.
The indicator light above the selected button should
slowly blink. This button may need to be held for up
to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device, or
home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing a
different button in Step 6 than what was used for the
garage door opener.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for each
switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Pull the bottom of the glove box handle upward to open
it. Use the key to lock and unlock the glove box.
Cupholders
Cupholders are located in the center console for the
front passengers. Press down on the access door
release to open and use the front cupholders. Push
the door back down to close it. Push down and
then back on the front cupholder to remove it for
cleaning.
To set to cool mode, press and release the button
the i shows blue. Press and release again to turn
it off.
Heated and Cooled Cupholders
For vehicles with heated and cooled cupholders, these
are located in the front center console.
To set to heat mode, press and release the button
the h shows red. Press and release again to turn it off.
Press down on the access door release button to open
the cupholder door.
Insulated containers will not work properly. Use only
non-insulated containers.
Notice: When the cuphholder is turned on, the
inside receptacles are hot or cold. Temperature
variations in the cupholders may cause
condensation. To avoid damage, do not store
electronic devices or other items here.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Passenger Cupholders
Center Console Storage
A console compartment is located between the bucket
seats.
The console has both an upper and lower storage bin
accessed by lifting up on the latches located at the front
of the console lid.
The console may have an accessory power outlet
The rear of the console also has a cupholder that swings
down for the rear seat passengers to use.
Assist Handles
Assist handles located above the rear passenger doors
can be used when getting out of the vehicle. Pull the
handles downward to use them.
Pull down on the lid to access the cupholders in the
rear floor console.
Garment Hooks
Vehicles with the rear seat armrest may also contain
cupholders. Pull down the armrest to use the cupholders.
There are garment hooks located on the assist handles.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
Luggage Carrier
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, place
the load in the area over the rear wheels (behind the
rear side door on extended models). If needed, cut a
piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
and siderails to spread the load. If plywood is used,
tie it to the siderail supports.
For vehicles with a luggage carrier, items can be loaded
on top of the vehicle.
The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof and
crossrails, if equipped, which can be moved back and
forth to help secure cargo. To adjust them, turn the knob
located at each end of the crossrail counterclockwise until
the crossrail can move freely. To secure the crossrail,
turn the knob located at each end of the crossrail
clockwise until tightened. Tie the load to the siderails or
siderail supports.
• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding.
To move the crossrails, pull out on the latch release
handle at each end. Slide the crossrail to the desired
position balancing the force side to side. Push the
release handle back into the latched position and
slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to be sure
the latch snaps securely into place.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle can damage the vehicle.
Load cargo so that it rests as far forward as possible
and against the side rails, making sure to fasten it
securely.
• If needed to carry long items, move the crossrails as
far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the crossrails
and the siderails or siderail supports. Also tie the
load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so tightly
that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 5-33.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely locked
into the siderail.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo, check now and
then to make sure the luggage and cargo are still
securely fastened.
A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) is located
above the glass or above the rear load doors.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care
should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are two switches in
the overhead console that
operate the sunroof.
Rear Storage Area
For vehicles with a rear storage area, it is located in the
rear cargo area of the vehicle on the driver’s side trim
panel.
Turn the knobs and swing the storage door to access
the storage compartment. The door can be removed.
Rear Seat Armrest
For vehicle with an armrest/storage compartment located
by the second row seat, pull the loop at the top of the
armrest out to lower the armrest.
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof
press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch until
the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close
the sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver’s side
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof,
but can also be opened manually.
Push the button on the front of the armrest and pull the
top up to open the compartment.
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition needs
to be turned to ON/RUN, or Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) must be active. When RAP is active, the sunroof
will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, or
until a front door is opened. See Retained Accessory
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From the
comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s side
switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full-open
position.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the
sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver’s
side switch. The sunroof will open automatically. To stop
the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time.
To express-close the sunroof, fully press and release
the front of the driver’s side switch. The sunroof will
close automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press
the switch a second time. The sunshade will open
automatically with the sunroof, but can also be opened
manually.
Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will
detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing
at the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will
then open halfway, and the air deflector will raise.
To close the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer to the
“Express-Close” or “Manual-Close” functions described
previously. If the sunroof is in the vent position, and there
is an object in the path of the sunroof when it closing,
the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and stop the
sunroof. To close the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer
to the “Manual-Close” or “Express-Close” functions
described previously.
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From the
comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s side
switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full-open
position.
Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time
while the vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in
the tracks, damage the sunroof operation and plug the
water draining system.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Vent: The sunroof has an express-vent open feature.
From the closed position, press the rear of the
passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof. To stop
the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the
passenger’s side switch. To stop the sunroof partway,
release the switch.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
on page 3-22.
N. Automatic Transfer Case Control. See Escalade
Two-Mode Hybrid Supplement for more information.
E. Shift Lever and Range Selection Mode.
on page 2-29.
page 3-27.
Washer Fluid Button. See Windshield Washer
(If Equipped).
Disable Button. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel up
or down.
Hazard Warning Flashers
page 1-7.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on top of the steering column, to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble. Press again to turn
the flashers off.
Heated Steering Wheel
For vehicles with a heated steering wheel, the button for
this feature is located on the steering wheel.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle’s
turn signals will not work.
( : Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off.
A light on the button displays when the feature is
turned on.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
The steering wheel takes about three minutes to start
heating.
Tilt Wheel
The power tilt wheel
control is located on the
left side of the steering
column.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N : Windshield Wipers
L : Windshield Washer
5 : Rear Wiper Delay
Z : Rear Wiper
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
= : Rear Wiper Wash
Flash-to-Pass Feature.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane Change Signals
5 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
If the turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the Driver Information Control (DIC).
To turn the chime and message off, move the turn
signal lever to the off position.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
5 3 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever for less than one second
until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change.
This causes the turn signals to automatically flash three
times. It will flash six times if tow-haul mode is active.
Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second
will cause the turn signals to flash until you release
the lever.
When the high beams
are on, this indicator light
on the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
page 6-106.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic
position.
6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time.
The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as
the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can
be very useful in light rain or snow.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
? (High Speed): For high-speed wiping.
If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low
beam, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will
stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you. The
high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will
come on. Release the lever to return to normal operation.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently loosen
or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not clear the
windshield well, making it harder to see and drive safely.
If the blades do become damaged, install new blades or
blade inserts. For more information, see Windshield
For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps, the low-beam headlamps must be on
for the flash-to-pass feature to work.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Wipers
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Turn to mist for a single wiping cycle.
Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.
The wipers stop after one wipe. Hold the band
on mist longer, for more wipe cycles.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rain sensor will automatically control the frequency
of the wipes from off to high speed according to the
weather conditions. The wipers can be left in a
Rainsense™ mode even when it is not raining.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
The vehicle has Rainsense™ II windshield wipers.
These wipers automatically turn on when a sensor,
mounted next to the inside rearview mirror, detects
moisture on the windshield. When active, these wipers
are able to detect moisture on the windshield and
automatically turn on the wipers.
When Rainsense™ II is active, the headlamps will
turn on automatically after approximately eight wipes.
The headlamps will turn off if the wiper switch is set
to a delay position, and there have been no wipes for
approximately three minutes, or if the wiper switch
is turned to the off position. If it is dark outside, the
headlamps will remain on.
To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipers must
be set to one of the five delay settings. Each of the
five settings adjusts the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Since different drivers have different setting preferences,
it is recommended that the mid-range setting, position
three, be used initially. For more wipes, select the higher
settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings located
closer to the off position on the multifunction lever.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
_ (Heated Windshield Washer): For vehicles with this
feature, the button is located in the switchbank under
the climate controls. Press while the ignition is turned on
to activate the heated windshield washer fluid system.
This activation will initiate four heated wash/wipe cycles.
The first heated wash/wipe cycle may take up to
40 seconds to occur, depending on outside temperature.
After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take up to
20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to begin.
Press the button again to turn off the heated windshield
washer fluid system or it will automatically turn off
after four wash/wipe cycles have been completed.
Windshield Washer
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
L (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system is
activated under certain outside temperature conditions,
steam may flow out of the washer nozzles for a short
period of time before washer fluid is sprayed. This is
a normal condition.
HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES PENDING is
displayed on the DIC when the washer system is heating
the fluid. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed
when the washer fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Off): Turns the wiper off.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Turns on the rear wiper delay.
Z (Rear Wiper): Turns on the rear wiper.
{ CAUTION:
= (Rear Wiper Wash): To turn on the rear wiper
wash, push the button on the end of the turn signal/
multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The wipers will clear the rear window and
either stop or return to your preset speed. For more
washer cycles, press and hold the button.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
The rear wiper control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
The rear window wiper/washer will not operate if the
liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar. If the liftgate or liftglass
is opened while the rear wiper is on, the wiper will return
to the parked position and stop.
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to a wiper
position.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the brakes are applied, cruise control is turned off.
Cruise Control
For vehicles with an Allison® or Hydra-Matic 6-speed
automatic transmission, see “Grade Braking and Cruise
Grade Braking (Allison Transmission) under Tow/Haul
control interacts with the Range Selection Mode,
tow/haul and grade braking systems.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, and the system begins
to limit wheel spin, cruise control will automatically
When road conditions allow the cruise control to
be safely used again, it can be turned back on.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise Control shown
with Heated Steering
Wheel Button
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
(If Equipped)
The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the
steering wheel.
T (On/Off): Turns the system on or off. The indicator
light is on when cruise control is on and turns off
when cruise control is off.
1. Press the I button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
wheel and release it.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or make
the vehicle decelerate.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and
then the brakes are applied, this shuts off the cruise
control. But it does not need to be reset.
To reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, press the +RES button on the
steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the previously
set speed and stays there.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press
the SET– button on the steering wheel briefly.
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will
slow down to the previous set cruise speed.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Exterior Lamps
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. When the brakes are applied the cruise control
turns off.
The exterior lamps control
is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
Ending Cruise Control
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Taillamps
• Press the [ button on the steering wheel.
• Press the I button on the steering wheel.
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together
with the following lamps listed below.
9 (Off): Turns off the automatic headlamps and
daytime running lamps (DRL). Turning the headlamp
control to the off position again will turn the automatic
headlamps or DRL back on.
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position only
works when the vehicle is shifted into the P (Park)
position.
• License Plate Lamps
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is
on, the headlamps will turn off automatically 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps
are turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps
will stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning
off to prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the
headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp
on position to make the headlamps stay on for an
additional 10 minutes.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the
following:
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with IntelliBeam®
IntelliBeam® will only activate your high-beams when
driving over 20 mph (32 km/h).
IntelliBeam® Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System
For vehicles with this feature, be sure to read this entire
section before using it.
The high-beam headlamps will remain on, under the
automatic control of IntelliBeam®, until any of the
following situations occur:
IntelliBeam® is an enhancement to the vehicle’s
headlamp system. Using a digital light sensor on the
rearview mirror, this system will turn the vehicle’s
high-beam headlamps on and off according to
surrounding traffic conditions.
• The system detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps.
• The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.
The IntelliBeam® system turns the high-beam
• The outside light is bright enough that high-beam
headlamps are not required.
headlamps on when it is dark enough, there is no other
traffic present, and the IntelliBeam® system is enabled.
• The vehicle’s speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).
Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam®
• The headlamp stalk is moved forward to the
high-beam position. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Press and release the IntelliBeam® button on the inside
rear view mirror. The IntelliBeam® indicator on the mirror
will turn on to let you know the system has been turned
on. Once the system has been turned on, it will remain
on each time the vehicle is started. Additionally, the
IntelliBeam® system must be enabled.
To enable the IntelliBeam® system, turn the exterior
lamp control to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction
lever in its neutral position. The High-Beam On Light
will appear on the instrument panel cluster when
the high-beams are on. See Highbeam On Light
on page 3-46.
When either of these conditions occur, the
IntelliBeam® feature will be disabled and the
IntelliBeam® light in the mirror will turn off until the
high-beam stalk is returned to the neutral position.
• If IntelliBeam® was using low-beams prior to
this action, the IntelliBeam® feature will be
temporarily disabled until the stalk is returned
to the neutral position.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting
except AUTO.
When this occurs, IntelliBeam® will be disabled until
the control is turned back to the AUTO position.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked or
obstructed by something that blocks the view
of the IntelliBeam light sensor.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice, dirt,
haze or other obstructions.
• The IntelliBeam® system is turned off at the inside
rearview mirror.
• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of
the vehicle points upward, causing the IntelliBeam
sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps
and taillamps.
IntelliBeam® may not turn off the high-beams if the
system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because
of any of the following:
• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.
• The others vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,
obstructed from view or otherwise undetected.
You may need to manually disable or cancel the
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,
snow and/or road spray.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected due
to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,
mist or other airborne obstructions.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam® at
the Rearview Mirror
IntelliBeam® can be disabled by using the controls on
the inside rearview mirror.
Cleaning the IntelliBeam® Light Sensor
The light sensor is located
on the inside of the vehicle
in front of the inside
rearview mirror.
AUTO 3 (On/Off): To disable the system, press this
button on the inside rearview mirror. The IntelliBeam®
indicator will turn off and will not come back on until the
IntelliBeam® button is pressed again.
(Stalk Disable): When IntelliBeam® has turned on the
high-beams, pull or push the high-beam stalk. This will
disable IntelliBeam®. The IntelliBeam® indicator on the
mirror will turn off. To re-enable IntelliBeam®, press the
IntelliBeam® button on the mirror.
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using
glass cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor
window. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
surface of the sensor window.
A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer
diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holding this
button for 20 seconds until the IntelliBeam® indicator
light flashes three times. If you accidentally activate this,
the vehicle’s setting will automatically be reset each
time the ignition is turned off and then on again.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
Headlamps on Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when
the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on
and the key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime,
turn the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then back
on, or close and re-open the door. In the AUTO mode,
the headlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK/OFF
or may remain on until the headlamp delay ends
(if enabled in the DIC). See “Exit Lighting” under
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior
lamps control to the OFF position and then release.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must
be in the P (Park) position, before the DRL lamps can
be turned off.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp
system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness,
along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps,
and the instrument panel lights. The radio lights will
also be dim.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release
it. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission
must be in the P (Park) position, before the automatic
headlamp system can be turned off.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel in the defroster grille that regulates
when the automatic headlamps turn on. Do not cover
the sensor or the headlamps will come on whenever
the ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The transmission is not in P (Park).
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker, instrument panel lights,
and other lamps will not be on.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that
driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights
does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system is only affected when the light sensor
detects a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the control is located next
to the exterior lamps control on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering column.
# (Fog Lamps): Press the button to turn the fog lamps
on or off. A indicator light comes on in the instrument
panel cluster. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position for the fog lamps to come on.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. During
that delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be
as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel
brightness control is in the full bright position.
When the fog lamps are turned on, the headlamps
automatically turn on.
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the
fog lamps also go off. When the high-beam headlamps
go off, the fog lamps will come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the control to the off position.
The headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
vehicle. This feature can be programmed using the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
The regular headlamp system can be turned on when
needed.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights
and is located next to the exterior lamp control.
k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome
lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button
again to return it to the extended position so that the
dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the instrument panel lights. Turning the knob to the
farthest clockwise position turns on the dome lamps.
Entry Lighting
Dome Lamps
The vehicle has an illuminated entry feature.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome override button is in the extended position.
If the dome override button is pressed in, the lamps will
not come on.
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning
the instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or
closed.
Exit Lighting
The interior lamps come on when the key is
removed from the ignition. They turn off automatically
in 20 seconds. The lights do not come on if the dome
override button is pressed in.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
Reading Lamps
If the vehicle has reading lamps, press the button
located next to the lamp to turn it on or off.
The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine
idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed.
It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some
accessories.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not
be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The accessory power outlets are powered, even when
the ignition is in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use power
outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF may cause
the vehicle’s battery to run down.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left
on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is
in LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent the battery
from running down.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding electrical equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets let you plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
The vehicle has three accessory power outlets.
They are located inside the floor console storage bin,
on the back of the floor console, and in the rear
cargo area on the passenger side.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment. Do not use equipment exceeding
the maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
To use an accessory power outlet, remove the protective
cap. When not in use, always cover the accessory
power outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
adapter or vehicle fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the
accessory power plugs.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Analog Clock
The front ashtray and cigarette lighter are located in the
center console near the cupholders, if the vehicle has
them. Press on the access door to open it and use
the ashtray and lighter.
The analog clock is not connected with any other
vehicle system and runs by itself.
To adjust the clock, do the following:
1. Locate the adjustment button, near the lower left
corner of the clock.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance
the clock hands. Holding the button down will
cause the clock to advance faster. Release the
button before you get to the desired time.
To remove the ashtray, pull it from the center console.
Slide it back in and push down to be sure it is secure.
3. Push and release the button to increase the time
by one minute increments until the desired time is
reached.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Heated and
Cooled Seats
H. Fan Control
I. REAR
J. Air Delivery Mode
Control
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
O (Off): Press the driver side temperature knob to
turn the climate control system off. Outside air still
enters the vehicle, and is directed to the floor. This
direction can be changed by pressing the mode button.
The temperature can also be adjusted using either
temperature knob. Press the up or down arrows on the
fan switch, the defrost button, the AUTO button, driver’s
side temperature knob, or the air conditioning button to
turn the system on when it is off.
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can
be controlled with this system. The vehicle also has
a flow-through ventilation system described later in
this section.
Driver and Passenger Side
Temperature Knob
The driver and passenger side temperature knobs
are used to adjust the temperature of the air coming
through the system on the driver or passenger’s side
of the vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted even
if the system is turned off. This is possible since outside
air always flows through the system as the vehicle is
moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Climate Control with Cooled and Heated Seats
shown
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the cabin temperature. The display will
show the temperature setting increasing or decreasing.
A. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
B. AUTO
D. Recirculation
E. Rear Window
Defogger
Set the passenger temperature setting to match the
driver temperature setting by pressing the passenger
temperature knob.
C. Defrost
F. Air Conditioning
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
Automatic Operation
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for
the system to regulate. Use the driver or passenger
temperature buttons to adjust the temperature setting
as necessary. If a temperature setting of 60°F (15°C)
is chosen, the system remains at the maximum
cooling setting. If a temperature setting of 90°F
(32°C) is chosen, the system remains at the
maximum heat setting. Choosing either maximum
setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool
any faster.
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature,
the air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current temperature(s) and AUTO come on
the display. The current delivery mode and fan speed
will also be displayed for approximately five seconds.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top of
the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on sun load and
also turns on the headlamps.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will
run when the outside temperature is over about
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set
to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet may
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to
help quickly cool down the vehicle. The light on
the button comes on in recirculation.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override
this delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some to the windshield, side window outlets, and second
row floor outlets. In this mode, the system automatically
selects outside air.
y 9 z (Fan Control): Press the up or down arrows
to increase or decrease the fan speed
Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the
system on.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents. In this mode, the system turns
off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is close to freezing.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
the defog mode.
Pressing either arrow while using automatic operation
will place the fan in manual operation. The fan setting will
display and the AUTO light will turn off. The air delivery
will remain in automatic operation.
N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press to change the
direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly press
the button until the desired mode appears on the display.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield
and side window vents, with some directed to the floor
vents. In this mode, the system automatically forces
outside air into the vehicle and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is close to
freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
in the defrost mode.
When the system is turned off, the display goes blank
after displaying the current status of the system.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed towards
the windshield and side window outlets. Cooler air
is directed to the upper vents and warmer air to the
floor vents.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning
(A/C) compressor on and off. An indicator light comes
on to show that the air conditioning is on.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that
the recirculation is on.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature is
too cool for air conditioning will make the air conditioning
indicator flash three times and then turn off indicating
the air conditioning mode is not available. If the air
conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops
below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning
to be effective, the air conditioning light turns off to show
that the air conditioning mode has been canceled.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the
air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defog, or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected with
one of those modes, the indicator light flashes three times
and then turns off. The air conditioning compressor
also comes on when this mode is activated. While in
recirculation mode the windows may fog when the
weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either
the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it takes
for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to
operate more efficiently.
The recirculation mode can also be turned off by turning
off the ignition.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water might drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
REAR: For vehicles with the rear heating and air
conditioning controls. Press the REAR button to turn
the rear climate control system on or off. See Rear
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of the instrument panel to direct the airflow.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. It automatically turns off after
it has been activated. The defogger can also be turned off
by turning off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all
the windows are clear.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of the windows.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, press
the fan up button to the maximum fan level before
driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow
and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging
the inside of the window.
Heated Mirrors: For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or
frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window
defog button is pressed. See Outside Heated Mirrors
on page 2-42.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout the
vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of the
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
Heated or Cooled Seats: For vehicles with heated
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR: Press the REAR button on the front climate
control system to turn the rear climate control system on
or off. An indicator comes on when the rear system is on.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System and Electronic Climate
Controls
The rear climate control system can also be turned off by
pressing and holding the C button. To turn the system on
from the rear seats, press any rear climate control button,
except the C button.
For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning
controls, they are integrated with the rear seat audio
controls located in the center console. The system
can be controlled from the front controls as well as
the rear controls.
Mimic Mode: This mode matches the rear climate
control to the front climate control airflow settings.
It comes on when REAR is pressed the first time.
Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating
airflow according to the settings of the rear controls.
To turn the system on from the rear, press any
rear climate control button, except the C button.
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls
A. Fan Control
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Temperature Control
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Operation, If Equipped.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
AUTO: Press the air delivery mode button until this
setting is selected to control the inside temperature, air
delivery, and fan speed. AUTO appears in the display
when automatic operation is active.
+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Press the + or
− buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature.
The rear control temperature display will show the
temperature setting increasing or decreasing.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is
a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
The display only indicates climate control functions
when the system is in rear independent mode.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
Manual Operation
D C (Fan Control): Press these buttons on the rear
seat audio control panel to increase or decrease the
airflow. Pressing the fan up button when the system is off
will turn the system on. The air delivery mode will remain
under automatic control.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may
be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.
+/− (Temperature Control): Press these buttons
to adjust the temperature of the air flowing into the
passenger area. Press the + button for warmer air
and press the − button for cooler air.
N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press the mode
button to change the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the desired
mode appears on the display. Multiple presses will cycle
through the delivery selections.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is
going, about how much fuel the vehicle has and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The vehicle’s odometer works together with the
Driver Information Center (DIC). The Trip odometer
can be set. See “Trip Odometer” under DIC Operation
The safety belt light
The odometer mileage can be checked while the
vehicle is not running. Simply press the trip stem
on the instrument panel cluster.
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the correct mileage total
of the old odometer.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has
been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero.
For more information see “Trip Odometer” under DIC
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started,
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled.
information. The passenger safety belt light, located
on the instrument panel, comes on and stays on for
several seconds and then flashes for several more.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is started.
If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
immediately.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as
a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and
or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
important safety information. The overhead console
has a passenger airbag status indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
for more information.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
more information. This light could indicate that there
are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there
is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the
light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned
to ON/RUN. If it does not, have it fixed so it will be ready
to warn if there is a problem.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light
comes on when the parking brake is set. If the vehicle
is driven with the parking brake engaged, a chime
sounds when the vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h).
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal could be harder to push or
could go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part
can still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking
both parts need to be working well.
{ CAUTION:
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have the brake system
inspected by your dealer/retailer.
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
This light can also come on due to low brake fluid.
United States
Canada
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
The StabiliTrak indicator
light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally
the indicator light then goes off.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on while driving, there
might be a problem with the StabiliTrak® system and the
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is
on, the system is off and does not limit wheel spin.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the
light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
page 3-39.
The light flashes if the system is active and is working
to assist the driver with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
information.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
brake related DIC messages.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This gage shows
the engine coolant
temperature.
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.
It provides information about tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is On Steady
If the indicator on the gage moves towards the shaded
area on the thermostat, it means that the engine coolant
has overheated. If the vehicle has been operating under
normal driving conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the
information.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
for more information.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling
on acceleration. These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
{ CAUTION:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if the battery has recently
been replaced or if the battery has run down.
The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate
critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This can take several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the vehicle still does
not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system
readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally
the indicator light then goes off.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.
Security Light
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-21.
Lights On Reminder
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control Light
Tow/Haul Mode Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
This light comes on when
the Tow/Haul mode has
been activated.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
Fuel Gage
Highbeam On Light
When the ignition is on, the
fuel gage shows about how
much fuel the vehicle has
left in the tank.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
for more information.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The gage will first indicate empty before the vehicle
is out of fuel, but the vehicle’s fuel tank should be
filled soon.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
Here are some situations owners may experience
with the fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem
with the fuel gage.
The DIC displays information about your vehicle.
It also displays warning messages if a system problem
is detected. The DIC also allows some features to be
page 3-65 for more information.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located in
the center of the instrument panel cluster.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off.
• The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is
turned off.
available.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average
economy, fuel used, timer, and transmission temperature.
The compass and outside air temperature will also be
shown in the display. The temperature will be shown
in °F or °C depending on the units selected.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, next to the steering wheel.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected. A digital speedometer also appears at the
bottom of the DIC display. The digital speedometer can
be enabled or disabled. See “DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED”
information.
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, side blind zone system on/off, tire
pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter programming, compass zone setting, and
compass recalibration.
DIC Buttons
U (Customization): Press this button to customize
the feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
The buttons are
the trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization,
and set/reset buttons.
The button functions are
detailed in the following
pages.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Range
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of remaining
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven
without refueling. The display will show LOW if the fuel
level is low.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This estimate
will change if driving conditions change. For example, if
driving in traffic and making frequent stops, this display
may read one number, but if the vehicle is driven on a
freeway, the number may change even though the same
amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is because different
driving conditions produce different fuel economies.
Generally, freeway driving produces better fuel economy
than city driving. Fuel range cannot be reset.
To switch between English and metric measurements,
see “Units” later in this section.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last
reset for the trip odometer.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
be counted as long as the ignition is on, even if another
display is being shown on the DIC. The timer will record
up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59)
after which the display will return to zero.
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE ECONOMY
displays. This display shows the approximate average
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number is calculated based on the
number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last
time this menu item was reset. To reset AVERAGE
ECONOMY, press and hold the set/reset button.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while
TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button while TIMER is displayed.
Fuel Used
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays.
This display shows the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
or degrees Celsius (°C).
Average Vehicle Speed
Timer
Press the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This display shows the average speed in
miles per hour (MPH) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.
This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount
of time that has passed since the timer was last reset,
not including time the ignition is off. Time will continue to
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
accidentally at any time other than when the oil
has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately
until the next oil change. To reset the engine oil
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Side Blind Zone Alert
Oil Life
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this display allows the system to be turned on
or off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to
select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the system
will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system will be
turned off. When the SBZA system is turned off, the DIC
will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF
message as a reminder that the system has been turned
information.
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of
the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will
alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under
page 6-15. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
for more information.
Units
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information
will then be displayed in the unit of measurement
selected.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure
Battery Voltage
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), the pressure for each tire can
be viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be
shown in either pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle information
button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa)
LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information button
again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa)
LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
This display shows the current battery voltage. If the
voltage is in the normal range, the value will display.
For example, the display may read BATTERY VOLTAGE
13.2 VOLTS. If the voltage is low, the display will show
LOW. If the voltage is high, the display will show HIGH.
Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based
on the state of the battery. The battery voltage may
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
for more information. If there is a problem with the
battery charging system, the DIC will display a message.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to check
the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display.
information.
Oil Pressure
This display will show the oil pressure in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of
a value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relearn Remote Key
Compass Zone Setting
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match
an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
This display allows for setting the compass zone.
Compass Recalibration
1. Press the vehicle information button until
This display allows for calibrating the compass.
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
Blank Display
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
This display shows no information.
DIC Compass
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state
or province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass
is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass must be set to the
variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example,
N for North, or the heading does not change after
making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna
mount, a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note
pad holder, or any other magnetic item. Turn off
the vehicle, move the magnetic item, then turn
on the vehicle and calibrate the compass.
2. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPAS (Compass)
displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the calibration is complete.
The DIC display will then return to the previous menu.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
DIC Warnings and Messages
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct
the condition. Multiple messages may appear one
after another.
System (TPMS), this message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to
be checked. This message also displays LEFT FRONT,
RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to
indicate which tire needs to be checked. You can
receive more than one tire pressure message at a time.
To read the other messages that may have been sent
at the same time, press the set/reset button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC
is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the display seriously and
remember that clearing the messages will only make
the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out
of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
This message displays when the engine oil needs to
be changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure
to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message.
for more information.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)
TURNED OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the air conditioning compressor turns back on.
You can continue to drive your vehicle.
on page 6-33 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures
for operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage.
This message clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
This message displays when the engine oil becomes
hotter than the normal operating temperature. Stop
and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES
PENDING
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine
further enters the engine coolant protection mode. See
This message displays when the heated windshield
washer system is heating the fluid. See Windshield
This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood
is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when ice conditions are possible.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted
out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFF
This message displays when the heated windshield
washer has been turned off. See Windshield Washer
on page 3-11 for more information.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the front
passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
REAR ACCESS OPEN
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and
do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure
has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate
and liftglass. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
PARKING ASSIST OFF
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
page 3-48 for more information.
After the vehicle has been started, this message
displays to remind the driver that the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system has been turned
off. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display. To turn
the URPA system back on, see Ultrasonic Rear
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be
replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”
on page 2-5.
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in
the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System Light
on page 3-38. Driving with this problem could drain the
battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Have the
electrical system checked as soon as possible. See your
dealer/retailer.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake system
warning light if there is a problem with the brake system.
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn
off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for
the message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving,
the brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect the
information.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE BRAKES SOON
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and
check for the message on the DIC display. If the message
is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving,
the brake system needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and this message displays, both SBZA displays
will remain on indicating there is a problem with the
SBZA system. If these displays remain on after continued
driving, the system needs service. See your dealer/
for more information.
SERVICE LEFT HEADLAMP
ASSEMBLY
SERVICE STABILITRAK
On some models, this message will be displayed when
the left headlamp is out and needs to be serviced.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message
displays, it means there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak system. If you see this message, try to
reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should
see your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle is safe to
drive, however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak,
so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
This message displays if there is a problem with the
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do not
use this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic
information. See your dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
SERVICE RIGHT HEADLAMP
ASSEMBLY
This message displays when the Road Sensing
Suspension (RSS) system is not operating properly.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
On some models, this message will be displayed when
the right headlamp is out and needs to be serviced.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF
This message displays when there is a problem
with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may
or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer before turning off the engine.
on page 2-23 for more information.
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
for more information.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), this message displays if a part on
the TPMS is not working properly. The tire pressure
light also flashes and then remains on during the same
Several conditions may cause this message to appear.
for more information. If the warning comes on and stays
on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
is disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot
detect vehicles in your blind zone. The sensor may be
blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush. This message
may also display during heavy rain or due to road spray.
It may also come on when driving in isolated areas with
no guardrails, trees, or road signs and light traffic.
Your vehicle does not need service. For cleaning
information.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when there is a problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). When this message displays, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
STABILITRAK OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when you turn off StabiliTrak, or when the stability control
has been automatically disabled. To limit wheel spin and
realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement
system, you should normally leave StabiliTrak on.
However, you should turn StabiliTrak off if your vehicle
gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want to
rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving
in extreme off-road conditions and require more wheel
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message may display along with the check engine
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s
fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off
or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
• The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn this light and message off.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), this message displays when
the TPMS is re-learning the tire positions on your
vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
information.
This message displays along with four chimes if
the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving
with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it
idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message
clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature
reaches a safe level.
TURN SIGNAL ON
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 6-14 for the location of the windshield washer
page 6-34 for more information.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead
to costly repairs that would not be covered by
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
DIC Vehicle Customization
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to scroll through the
available customizable options.
All of the customization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
information.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park).
DEUTSCH: All messages will appear in German.
ITALIANO: All messages will appear in Italian.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.
CHINESE: All messages will appear in Chinese.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
information.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be delayed.
When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door
lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this feature
will delay locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use.
The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to
work. You can temporarily override delayed locking by
pressing the power door lock switch twice or the lock
button on the RKE transmitter twice. See Delayed
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5
for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’s
doors.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door or the liftgate is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time
you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the
lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or
the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless
more information.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO HIGH BEAMS
CHIME VOLUME
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
to have the Intellibeam® system turned off or on.
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the
chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO HIGH
BEAMS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
OFF (default): The Intellibeam® system will be
turned off.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
ON: The Intellibeam® system will be turned on.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
EASY EXIT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt down when
the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). See Outside
information.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall
will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing
the easy exit seat button.
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
BUTTON AND KEY OUT (default): If the features
are enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the
driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle has the
power tilt wheel feature, the power steering column will
move up when the key is removed from the ignition or
after pressing the easy exit seat button.
when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition. If the
automatic movement has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat
and steering column will stay in the original exit position,
unless a memory recall took place prior to removing the
key again.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
This feature allows you to select your preference for
the remote memory seat recall feature. See Memory
EASY EXIT SETUP
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit
seat feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic
and “EASY EXIT RECALL” earlier for more information.
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will
occur.
ON: The driver’s seat, and on some vehicles, the
outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored
driving position when the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. On some
vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake pedal
feature, the pedals will also automatically move.
See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and
transmitters to driver ID numbers.
OFF: No automatic seat exit will recall.
SEAT ONLY: The driver’s seat will recall.
TILT ONLY: The steering wheel tilt feature will recall.
ALL (default): The driver’s seat and the steering wheel
tilt feature will recall.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE START
DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows you
to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote
This feature allows you to enable or disable the digital
speedometer on the DIC.
Press the customization button until DISPLAY DIGITAL
SPEED appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: The digital speedometer will be disabled.
ON (default): The digital speedometer will be enabled.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
This feature allows you to exit the feature
settings menu.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT
FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Bluetooth®
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).
Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones
are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more information
on compatible phones.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
page 5-2.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice Recognition
Bluetooth Controls
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
information.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Pairing
Audio System
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level
is used if the volume is turned down too low.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing Information:
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
Pairing a Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Paired Phone
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. After the system stores the phone number,
it responds with “Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with
“Store, number please” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
Using the Digit Store Command
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Delete Command
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
To use the delete command:
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
• Dial
• Digit Dial
• Call
• Re-dial
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Dial Command
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>”. “Number please” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re-entered.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Call Command
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the last
number called from the connected Bluetooth phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
Once connected, the person called will be heard through
the audio speakers.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Call Waiting
Ending a Call
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Press c x to end a call.
Muting a Call
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
To Mute a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
followed by a tone.
switch to the call on hold.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
Three-Way Calling
To Cancel Mute
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service
carrier to work.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
the callers together.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transferring a Call
Voice Pass-Thru
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Number During a Call
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System (Overhead)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The vehicle may have an Overhead DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system works
with the vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player is part of
the front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a
DVD player, a video display screen, and if the vehicle
has a third row seat, it could have a second video display
screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless headphones,
page 4-62 for more information on the vehicle’s audio/
DVD system.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Control of the Audio System
Headphones
The driver has basic control of the whole audio system.
Press and hold O for more than two seconds to turn
off the radio, RSE, and the RSA (rear seat audio).
information.
Before Driving
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system might not work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating range for the RSE
system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below 140°F (60°C).
If the temperature of the vehicle is outside of this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within
the operating range of the RSE system.
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones
that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is dedicated
to the DVD player, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA
selections. These headphones are used to listen to
media such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio, any
auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary
input jack, if the vehicle has this feature. The wireless
headphones have an On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch,
and a volume control.
If the vehicle has a third row video screen display, it has
two additional headphones.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push the power button to turn on the headphones.
An indicator light located on the headphones comes on.
If the light comes on but, there is intermittent sound
and/or static on the headphones, or if the indicator
light does not come on, the batteries might need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section
for more information. Switch the headphones to Off when
not in use.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
The infrared transmitters are located at the rear of
the RSE overhead console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system
and the RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of
range of the transmitters for more than 3 minutes. If you
move too far forward or step out of the vehicle, the
headphones lose the audio signal.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
The headphones automatically turn off after four hours
of continuous use.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the
diagram on the inside of the battery compartment.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door
screw.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones
must be worn correctly. Headphones should be worn
with headband over the top of the head for best audio
reception. The symbol L (Left) appears on the upper left
side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on the
left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears on the upper right
side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on the
right ear.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks
and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen
power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player mode,
pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote control
switches the video screen from the DVD player mode
to the auxiliary device. The radio plays the audio of the
connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary.
information.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio
device’s volume to the loudest level. Higher levels
of volume decreases audio distortion.
It is always best to power a portable audio device
through its own battery while playing.
The A/V jacks are located on the rear of the floor
console. The A/V jacks allow audio or video signals
to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Adapter connectors or cables (not included) may be
required to connect the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks.
Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change
any feature, perform the following:
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A)
is for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the
left audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio
input.
1. Press the z button on the remote control.
2. Use the remote control Q , R , q , r navigation
arrows and the r button to use the setup menu.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio
system.
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup
menu from the screen.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Output
Video Screen(s)
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
heard through the following possible sources:
The video screen(s) are located in the overhead
console.
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
To use the video screen(s):
1. Push the release button located on the overhead
console.
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if the vehicle has this feature.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available.
See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and
the DVD continues to play through the previous audio
source. Use the remote control power button or eject the
disc to turn off the screen.
The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if the
vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the RSA system.
more information.
The overhead console contains the IR (infrared)
transmitters for the wireless headphones and the IR
receivers for the remote control. They are located at
the rear of the console.
When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, the
rear seat passengers are be able to hear audio from
the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the overhead console and press
the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
can affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive
signals from the remote control. If the remote control
does not seem to be working, the batteries may need
to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section. Objects blocking the line of sight can
also affect the function of the remote control.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control power button can be used to turn on the video
screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
turn on the video screen display. See Navigation Audio
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs will
not be covered by the warranty. Storage in extreme
cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the remote
control stored in a cool, dry place.
O (Power): Press to turn the video screen on and off.
P (Illumination): Press to turn the remote control
backlight on. The backlight automatically times out after
7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged,
a new universal remote control can be purchased.
If this happens, make sure the universal remote control
uses a code set of Toshiba®.
v (Title): Press to return the DVD to the main menu
of the DVD. This function can vary for each disc.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
y (Main Menu): Press to access the DVD menu.
The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD
menu. After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when using a DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press to start playing a DVD.
Press while a DVD is playing to pause it. Press again
to continue playing the DVD.
When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio,
perform slow play by pressing the play/pause button
then pressing the fast forward button. The DVD continues
playing in a slow play mode. Depending on the radio,
perform reverse slow play by pressing the play/pause
button and then pressing the fast reverse button.
To cancel slow play mode, press the play/pause button.
Q, R, q, r (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press to select the choice that is
highlighted in any menu.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return to the
start of the current track or chapter. Press again to go
to the previous track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
z (Display Menu): Press to adjust the brightness,
screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom), and display
the language menu.
q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu
and return to the previous menu. This button operates
only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to go to the beginning
of the next chapter or track. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, fast reversing,
or fast forwarding a DVD. Press twice to return to
the beginning of the DVD.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a third row video screen, the AUX
button controls the source display on the second
row video screen, and the third row video screen
as described in the table below:
r (Fast Reverse): Press to fast reverse the DVD
or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video, press the
play/pause button. To stop fast reversing a DVD audio or
CD, release the fast reverse button. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
Aux Button
Press
Second Row
Screen
Third Row
Screen
[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the DVD
or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD video, press the
play/pause button. To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
or CD, release the fast forward button. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
Default State
(No Press)
DVD Media
DVD Media
Aux Video
Source
Aux Video
Source
Aux Video
Source
First Press
Second Press
Third Press
DVD Media
Aux Video
Source
Return to
Default State
DVD Media
e (Audio): Press to change audio tracks on DVDs
that have this feature when the DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function vary for
each disc.
Return to
Default State
Fourth Press
d (Camera): Press to change camera angles on DVDs
that have this feature when a DVD is playing. The format
and content of this function varies for each disc.
{ (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/OFF subtitles and to
move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function varies for
each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch the system between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
\ (Clear): Press within three seconds after entering a
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
numeric selection, to clear all numeric inputs.
The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
Check the display mode
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
menu button on the remote
control.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press to select chapter
or track numbers greater than 9. Press this button
before entering the number.
The picture does not
fill the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries:
1. Slide the rear cover back on the remote control.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the
diagram on the inside of the battery compartment.
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and
the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
3. Replace the battery cover.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
incorrectly.
After stopping the player,
If the stop button was
I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the DVD
the DVD starts where I left player resumes playing
off and sometimes at the
beginning.
where the DVD was
stopped. If the stop button
was pressed two times
the DVD player begins to
play from the beginning of
the DVD.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Display Error Messages
Problem
Recommended Action
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
The DVD display error message depends on which
radio the vehicle has. The video screen might display
one of the following:
Disc Load/Eject Error: Displays when there are disc
load or eject problems.
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts
out or buzzes.
Check for obstructions,
low batteries, reception
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using a
cellular telephone in
the vehicle.
Disc Format Error: Displays if the disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: Displays, if the disc is not from
a correct region.
Check that the
No Disc Inserted: Displays, if no disc is present
when Z or DVD AUX is pressed on the radio.
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
DVD Distortion
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
See your dealer/retailer
for assistance.
Check that the RSE video
screen is sourced to the
DVD player.
Video distortion may occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
Video Display Screens
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use
only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage can result.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System (Headrest DVD)
Vehicles with an RSE system include two head restraint
video display screens with integrated DVD players,
auxiliary inputs, two wireless headphones, and a remote
control. This system works independently from the
vehicle’s Overhead DVD RSE system. See the vehicle’s
owners manual for information about the Overhead DVD
RSE system.
The video display screens are located on the backside
of each head restraint.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage can occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screens” later in this section for more information.
The vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the RSE system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off. See “Retained
Accessory Power (RAP)” in the owners manual for
more information.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DVD player can be controlled by using the
buttons located below the video display screen or
by using the buttons on the system’s remote control.
See “Remote Control” later for more information.
Using the RSE System
The following discs are compatible with the DVD player:
• DVD-Video: A DVD that has video.
• CD-DA: A CD that has music or sound
content only.
• CD-Video: A CD that has a movie.
• CD-R/RW: A disc that has audio files such as CD-R
with downloaded MP3 files, MPEG, or JPEG files.
The DVD player and discs are coded by global region.
The DVD players are set to Region 1. Discs with
other region codes will not work in the players.
If an error message displays on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.
DVD Player: The loading slot for the DVD player is
located at the top of the head restraint. Insert the disc
partially into the loading slot with the printed side facing
the rear of the vehicle. The DVD player automatically
draws the disc in, “Loading” displays on the screen
along with a disc indicator, and playback starts. If the
disc is inserted incorrectly, the DVD player ejects
the disc and No Disc displays.
While the vehicle is moving, passengers should not
unfasten their safety belts to make adjustments to
the video screen control buttons. See “Safety Belts”
under, Seats and Restraint Systems in the vehicle’s
owner manual. Use the remote control for any necessary
adjustments. See “Remote Control” later in this
supplement.
Some DVDs do not allow fast forwarding or skipping
of the copyright information or previews. If the DVD does
not begin playing at the main title, refer to the on-screen
instructions.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This icon disappears after a few seconds. Press the
stop button a second time, or eject the disc, to cancel
the pre-stop feature and to clear the disc position
memory.
POWER O : Press to turn the power on or off. Each
video screen can be powered on or off independently.
EJECT X : Press to eject a disc from the DVD slot.
SOURCE: Press to select between Monitor 3,
Monitor 4, or the AV INPUT.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed,
it will automatically reload into the player. Another way to
reload a disc that has been ejected, but not removed
from the DVD player, is to press the eject button or the
play button.
Each video display screen can be adjusted
independently, as well as display information
from both DVD players and both A/V inputs.
PLAY r : Press this button located below the video
display screen to start playback of a disc. On DVDs and
video CDs with playback control (PBC), menu screens
can display automatically. It might be necessary to press
the play button again to begin play.
Infrared Remote Sensor: Located in the top center
of the video display screen. Do not block the signal from
the remote to the sensor.
Infrared Transmitters: Located in the top center of
the video display screen. Do not block the signal from
the headphones to the transmitter.
There is a play position memory feature for DVD and
video CD only. If the DVD player is turned off and then
turned back on, the DVD player resumes playback
where the disc stopped. The play position memory
is erased if the disc is removed.
Video Display Screen: Located on the back of each
headrest.
AV OUTPUT (Audio/Video Output Jack): Located on
the lower left side of the screen and is identified on
the video screen panel as the AV OUTPUT.
STOP c : Press once to stop playing a DVD.
There is a pre-stop feature for DVD and video CD only.
This feature resumes playback of the disc where it
was stopped. Press the stop button once during disc
playback and c displays on the DVD startup screen.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headphone Jack: Wired headphones can be
plugged into the headphone jack with one-eighth inch
stereo plugs.
Vehicle Speakers
Audio from the DVD player or an auxiliary device
can be heard through the vehicle speakers or the
wireless/wired headphones, while the radio is tuned to
one of the six frequencies selected on the Sound Around
portion of the system’s remote control. See “Remote
Control” later in this supplement.
AV INPUT: (Audio/Video Input Jack): The audio/video
input jack is located below the video display screen
and allows viewing of auxiliary sources such as portable
DVD players, game stations, or video cameras, on
each screen.
Only one audio source can be heard through the
vehicle’s speakers at a time. The audio source being
used is specified by the A/V (audio/video) source
selected on the driver side head restraint video display
screen.
• Video Input — The yellow connector is used for
video input.
• L Audio — The white connector is used for the left
side audio.
To turn the RSE system audio output to the vehicle’s
speakers, press Sound Around ON, on the system’s
remote control. The audio from the RSE system can be
heard through the wireless/wired headphones and the
vehicle’s speakers at the same time. The volume on the
radio can vary when switching between the radio, CD,
DVD, MP3, or an auxiliary device.
• R Audio — The red connector is used for the right
side audio.
Level Lock and Release Latch: The viewing angle
of the video screen can be adjusted by releasing
the latch and gently moving the screen. Then lock
it into a secure position.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wireless Headphones
VOL 0 (Volume): Use to adjust the volume on the
headphones.
The two wireless headphones included with the
Headrest DVD RSE system will only work with the
Headrest DVD RSE system and are marked for channel 3
and 4. The wireless headphones must be used within a
line of sight of the transmitter that is located above the
video display screen.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
3-4 Channel Selector: This is located on the right
earpiece. Either Channel 3 or 4 can be selected with the
channel selector. The driver side monitor is designated as
Channel 3, and the passenger side as Channel 4. Set the
channel selector switch according to the video display
screen being viewed. The message, “To listen to this
monitor tune your headphones to Channel 3 (or 4)”
displays for five seconds then disappears when the
video display screen is turned on.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim at the remote sensor
located on top center of the video display screen
and press the desired button.
Objects blocking the line-of-sight can affect the function
of the remote control. Direct or very bright light can affect
the ability of the transmitter to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries might need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” following this section.
OFF/ON (Power): Turn the power switch located on
the earpiece to turn the wireless headphones on or off.
Each headphone has a light to indicate ON. If the
light does not come on, the batteries may need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” under Rear Seat
Entertainment System in the vehicle’s owner manual.
The remote control provided with the Headrest DVD
RSE system, is not a universal remote control and will
not control other equipment.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs will
not be covered by the warranty. Storage in extreme
cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the remote
control stored in a cool, dry place.
The headphones shut off automatically if the RSE system
is turned off or if the headphones are out of range of the
transmitter for more than three minutes.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP: Press to change the default settings, see
“Using the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) Menus”
later in this manual. There are four main menu screens,
each screen displays a menu to select different
setting options. The screens are:
Remote Control Buttons
1. General Setup — adjusts screen settings.
2. Audio Setup — sets the language.
3. Preference Screen — sets the subtitles and
parental controls.
4. Password Setup — allows a password to be set.
Press SETUP again to exit.
EJECT X : Press to eject or reload a disc.
DVD-Video Screen 3: Press the DVD button located
under 3 to transmit IR codes for DVD mode on
Video Screen 3.
POWER: Press to turn the Headrest DVD RSE system
on and off.
TV-Video Screen 3: This button is not used with the
system.
SOURCE: Press to select between Monitor 3,
Monitor 4, or AV INPUT. Any video equipment
connected to the AV inputs automatically overrides
the source selection.
DVD-Video Screen 4: Press the DVD button located
under 4 to transmit IR codes for DVD mode on
Video Screen 4.
TV-Video Screen 4: This button is not used with the
system.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND AROUND ON/OFF: Press to turn the FM
Transmitter power on or off.
Q, R, q, r (Navigation Arrows): Press to navigate
through menus.
MUTE > (For DVD Only): Press to turn off the
headphone sound. Press again to turn the sound
on again.
ENTER: Press to enter a selected function or to begin
playback of the disc.
REPEAT 7 : Press to repeat part or all of a chapter,
title, track, or the entire disc after using the A-B button to
setup repeat preset sections.
PIX (Picture Selection): Press to adjust the picture’s
On Screen Display (OSD). Each time this button is
pressed, the picture adjustment OSD, cycles through
bars for BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, COLOR, and TINT.
Use the right/left navigation arrows to adjust the setting.
This feature automatically shuts off id another button is
pressed or adjustments are not made within six seconds.
RETURN 8 : This button is not used with the system.
A-B: This button is used to setup repeat preset
sections. Press this button once while the disc is playing
to select the starting position. Press a second time to
select the end position. Press a third time to turn the
SOUND AROUND SELECT: Press to select an FM
transmitter channel. The SOUND AROUND SELECT
lets the DVD audio play over the vehicle’s sound system
by tuning the radio to one of the six FM frequencies
listed below.
function off. To view the preset section, press 7 .
AUTO MEMORY: This button is not used with the
system.
• CH1: 88.3MHz
• CH2: 88.7MHz
• CH3: 89.1MHz
• CH4: 89.5MHz
• CH5: 89.9MHz
• CH6: 90.3MHz
SEARCH/SKIP: This button is not used with the
system.
ERASE/ADD: This button is not used with the system.
R-S: This button is not used with the system.
MENU: Press to enter the DVD disc menu while the
disc is playing.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TITLE: Press to enter the disc title mode. The title
feature is disc-specific, and may not be available on
all discs.
The options for CD are: Off, Concert, Living room, Hall,
Bathroom Cave, Arena, and Church.
RANDOM: Press to play titles randomly.
SUBTITLE: Press to change the subtitle language to
another available language or to turn subtitles off.
PLAY/PAUSE r / j : Press to start playback of the
disc, or to pause playback.
ANGLE: Press to select a different viewing angle for
discs that are recorded with different camera angles.
STOP c : Press to stop playback of a disc.
AUDIO: Press to select a different language for
discs that are recorded with different languages.
• To resume disc playback, press PLAY.
• To start playback from the beginning of the disc,
press STOP, STOP, then PLAY.
0-9 (Numbers): The numbers located on the lower
left side of the remote control can be used to enter
numbered menu options, channels, or track numbers.
ZOOM: Press to either enlarge the viewed image by
2X, 3X, and 4X, or reduce the image by 1/2X, 1/3X,
and 1/4X.
GOTO: Press to enter the GOTO menu to choose
a desired title, chapter, track, or song inside the disc.
DISPLAY: Press to scroll through display information
on the upper left corner of the screen, such as title,
chapter/track, time elapsed, and time remaining,
or to turn off the display
PBC (Playback Control): Press to turn video CD
playback control on or off.
FR r (Fast Reverse): Press to fast reverse the disc.
Press multiple times to choose between 2X, 4X, 8X,
16X, and 32X speeds.
PROGRAM: Press to edit a playback program
containing desired titles in the DVD or tracks in
the CD-DA.
FF [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the disc.
Press multiple times to choose between 2X, 4X, 8X,
16X, and 32X speeds.
3D: Press to change between different 3D audio modes
for DVD or CD.
The options for DVD are: Off, Rock, Pop, Live, Dance,
Techno, Classic, and Soft.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREV g (Previous): Press to play the previous
chapter or track. To return to previous chapters or tracks
one at a time, press and release multiple times until
the desired chapter or track is reached.
Using the RSE On-Screen
Display (OSD) Menus
Use the OSD setup display menus for:
• Initial setup
NEXT l : Press to play the next chapter or track.
To go to the next chapter or track one at a time, press
and release multiple times until the desired chapter
or track is reached.
• Display setup
• Parental control setup
• Adjusting the picture quality
• Setting the various outputs
• On-screen display language
Battery Replacement
To change batteries in the remote control:
1. Turn the remote control face down.
To use the OSD menus while using the DVD player or
an auxiliary device:
2. Press down on the ridged area of the battery cover
and slide it off.
1. Press the SETUP button on the remote control to
display the icons and pages on the display screen.
3. Install two AAA batteries into the battery
compartment.
2. Select the desired page by using the left/right
navigation arrows to move the cursor.
4. Slide the cover back on until it clicks.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep it in a cool, dry place.
3. Press the SETUP button again on the remote
control to cancel use of the setup display.
Not all DVDs support all of the feature defaults in the
setup menus. If a feature is not supported, the defaults
are provided by the DVD media.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the language for the OSD:
To set the TV display:
1. Press the SETUP button on the remote control.
1. Press the SETUP button on the remote control.
2. Use the left/right navigation arrows to navigate the
General Setup Page, then use the down navigation
arrow to select the OSD language.
2. Use the left/right navigation arrows to navigate the
General Setup Page.
3. Press the down navigation arrow to select TV
Display sub-menu and to adjust the screen setting.
3. Press the right navigation arrow and then use
the up/down navigation arrows to select English,
French, or Spanish.
4. Press the right navigation arrow and then use the
up/down navigation arrows to select a display option.
The display options are:
• Normal/PS (Pan and Scan): This displays the
wide picture on the screen with a portion of
the left and right sides removed.
• Normal/LB (Letter-Box): This displays the wide
picture with black bands on the upper and
lower portions of the screen.
• Wide (16:9): This option is chosen if the video
screen panel is wide screen.
5. Press ENTER on the remote control to confirm the
screen.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reset all options to factory defaults:
1. Press the SETUP button on the remote control.
2. Use the left/right and down navigation arrows on
the remote control to select the Default sub-menu
under the Preference Page.
3. Press the right navigation arrow, then press ENTER
to reset.
This function will not affect the parental setting.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings for Parental Control
Use the SETUP MENU to access the parental control
feature. It allows for control of the type of movie rating
content (from G to Adult) that can be viewed and is only
accessible when no disc is loaded.
To setup the Parental Control:
1. Press the SETUP button on the remote control.
2. Use the left/right and down navigation arrows on
the remote control to select the Parental sub-menu
under the Preference Page.
3. Press the SETUP button, and use the right and
up/down navigation arrows to select any one of
the available Rating settings from the display menu.
The Rating settings are:
If a disc is inserted into the DVD compartment slot and
it exceeds the Parental Setting, the following message
appears on display:
• Kid SAF
• G
The Parental Setting of this player prohibits play. Would
you like to allow this disc to play?
• PG 13
• PG R
If yes if selected, the six digit password must be entered
for the disc to play. If the wrong password is entered,
the following message appears:
• R
• NC 17
This movie will not play due to the Parental Setting of
the player.
• ADULT
4. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To create a six digit password, use the numeric keypad
on the remote control. Press the ENTER button to
confirm. The default password is 136900.
To change the Parental Control Password:
1. Press the SETUP button on the remote control
2. Navigate to the Password sub-menu under
the Password Setup Page.
3. Press the right navigation arrow, then press
ENTER.
4. At the Old Password option, enter the old password
or the default password (136900).
5. At the New Password option, enter the new
password (six digits) using numeric buttons.
6. At the Confirm PWD option, confirm the new
password by entering the new password again.
7. Scroll to the OK button and press ENTER.
The message “Your password has been changed”
displays.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REPEAT: Press to toggle between Track and All.
The default for repeat is OFF.
Playing Audio CD
When an audio CD is playing, the display shows the
current track and the amount of time that track has been
playing, the total amount of time on the disc, and the
current time running on the disc.
• Track repeats the track that is playing.
• All repeats the disc that is playing.
Playing MP3 CD
DISPLAY: Press to choose from the following display
MP3 is the format for storing digital audio. An audio CD
quality song can be compressed into the MP3 format with
very little loss of quality, while taking up much less space.
CD-R/RW discs that have been encoded in MP3 format
can be played on the DVD player. See “Using an MP3”
under the Audio System(s) section in the vehicle’s owner
manual.
options:
1. Press DISPLAY once and Single Elapsed appears
along with the current track playing and the length
of time for that track.
2. Press DISPLAY twice and Single Remain appears
along with the current track playing and the amount
of time left on the track.
Selecting Folders and Songs
3. Press DISPLAY three times and Total Elapsed
appears along with the current track playing and
the total time that has played on the CD.
When an MP3 disc is inserted in the player, the
navigation screen appears. The folders and songs
can be changed by navigating through the file system.
The DVD player plays the songs in the order they
were burned to the disc.
4. Press DISPLAY four times and Total Remain
appears along with the current track playing and
the amount of time left on the CD.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Skipping a Song
NEXT: Press to go to the next song.
PREV (Previous): Press to return to the beginning of
the song that is currently playing. Press PREV twice
to go to the previous song.
Selecting a Play Mode
The order the songs are played can be temporarily
chosen on a disc. The FOLDER play mode is the
default. Press the REPEAT button to access the
play mode options.
The play mode options are:
• Single — Play a selected song.
1. Press STOP if a disc is playing. Press the up or
down navigation arrows on the remote control to
go through the folder list on the left side of the
screen.
• Folder — Play the folder in the order the songs
were recorded.
• Shuffle — Play the songs in random order, from
within the selected folder.
2. Press ENTER when the desired folder is
highlighted.
Using the REPEAT Feature
3. Press the up or down navigation arrows to go
through the song list and highlight the desired
song. Press ENTER to begin the playback of the
selected song.
REPEAT: Press to change between Repeat One and
Repeat Folder.
• Repeat One — Repeats the song that is playing.
• Repeat Folder — Repeats the folder that is playing.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
No Sound
Recommended Action
• Check that the
correct audio input
mode is selected.
Problem
Recommended Action
IR Sensor Inoperative
• Check that the
batteries are good in
the remote control.
• Check that the audio
cable is securely
plugged into the jack.
• Check that the
remote Control
IR Sensor is not
blocked.
Cleaning the Video Screens
• Aim the remote
control toward the
IR Sensor being
controlled.
The video display screens are made of a specially
coated glass and can be scratched or damaged by
abrasive products, solvents, or ammonia-based window
cleaners. Clean with a soft, lint-free, cotton cloth that
has been slightly dampened with warm water. Dry the
screens by wiping with a clean dry cotton cloth.
• Select the correct
screen, 3 or 4.
No picture
• Check that the
correct video input
mode is selected.
• Check that the video
cable is plugged into
the jack securely.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Components
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Use care when touching or cleaning the components
such as the DVD player or the discs.
Vehicles with this feature allow the rear seat passengers
to listen to and control any of the music sources: radio,
CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. The rear seat
passengers can control the same music sources the
front seat passengers are listening to (dual control) or
a different source. For example, rear seat passengers
can listen to and control a CD through the headphones,
while the driver listens to the radio through the speakers.
The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for
each set of headphones.
Do not use DVD lens cleaners for DVD players because
the lens of the DVD optics can become contaminated
by lubricants.
Handle CDs and DVDs carefully. Store them in their
original cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The DVD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD or
DVD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD or DVD may not play properly or not at all. If the
surface of a CD or DVD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
RSA functions can be operated even when the main
radio is off.
Audio can be heard through wired headphones
(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.
If the vehicle has this feature, audio can also be
heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD or DVD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
or DVDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
The audio system allows the rear speakers to continue
playing even when the RSA audio is active through
the headphones.
To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through
the RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to
the auxiliary input (if available), located below the RSA.
Turn the iPod on, then choose the auxiliary input
with the RSA SRCE button.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© ¨(Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM
(if equipped), press either the left ©or right ¨ seek
arrow to go to the previous or to the next station or
channels and stay there. This function is inactive, with
some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening
to the radio.
Press and hold either the left ©or right ¨ seek arrow
until the display flashes, to tune to an individual station.
The display stops flashing after the buttons have not
been pushed for more than two seconds. This function is
inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the radio.
While listening to a disc, press the right ¨seek arrow
to go to the next track or chapter on the disc. Press the
P (Power): Press the P button to turn RSA on
left ©seek arrow to go back to the start of the current
track or chapter (if more than ten seconds have played).
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front
seat passengers are listening to the disc.
and off.
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the
volume of the wired headphones. The left knob controls
the left headphones and the right knob controls the right
headphones.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press either
the left ©or right ¨ seek arrow to perform a cursor up
or down on the menu. Hold the left ©or right ¨ seek
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if
the vehicle has these features, DVD, and rear auxiliary.
arrow to perform a cursor left or right on the menu.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the
next preset radio station or channel set on the main
radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending
on the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,
press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs
are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
PROG button to perform the menu function, enter.
w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored
Theft-Deterrent Feature
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
x c (Previous/End): Press to go to the previous
radio station stored as a favorite, the next track if
a CD/DVD is playing, to reject an incoming call,
or end a current call.
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle
Radio Reception
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems
press and hold b g for longer than two seconds to
information.
AM
SRCE (Source/Voice Recognition): Press to switch
between the radio (AM, FM, XM), CD, DVD, and
rear auxiliary (if equipped).
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
Press and hold this button for longer than one second
to initiate voice recognition. See Voice Recognition
on page 4-86 for more information.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
FM Stereo
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station
while in AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨to go to the next
track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD
slot. Press the ¨if multiple discs are loaded to go
to the next disc while sourced to a CD player.
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside of the rear side windows may affect
radio reception or damage the rear side window
antenna. Repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear side
windows with sharp objects.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to the antenna
due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered
by the warranty.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Rear Side Window Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is located in the passenger rear
side windows. Make sure the inside surfaces of the
rear side windows are not scratched and that the lines
on the glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces
are damaged, they could interfere with radio reception.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Source (AM, FM, XM, CD, etc.) Touch Screen
for more information.
page 4-43 for more information.
K. e (Sound) Key. See “Sound Menu” under
more information.
B. Clock Touch Screen Button. See “Setting the Clock”
information.
C. POI (Point of Interest) Touch Screen Button.
See “Displaying Points of Interest (POI) on the
more information.
M. FAV (Favorite) Key. See “Storing Radio Station
page 4-62 for more information.
D. 1 (Zoom Out) Touch Screen Button.
for more information.
page 4-62 for more information.
O. M (Disc Up/Down) Key. See “Hard Keys” under
information.
E. y © ¨z (Seek) Key (Previous/Next).
for more information.
on page 4-62 for more information.
information.
G. NAV (Navigation) Key. See “Hard Keys” under
more information.
for more information.
information.
page 4-25 for more information.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T. Map DVD Slot. See “Installing the Map DVD” under
install and eject a map DVD.
Getting Started
Read this manual thoroughly to become familiar with
how the navigation system operates.
page 4-15 for more information.
The navigation system includes navigation and audio
functions.
V. Mark Touch Screen Button. See “Adding
Destinations to the Address Book” under
While entering the vehicle or when turning the vehicle
off, some DVD Map Disc noise is normal.
W. 0 (Zoom In) Touch Screen Button.
for more information.
Keeping your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive is important for safe driving. The navigation system
has built-in features intended to help keep your eyes on
the road and mind on the drive. Some features may be
disabled while driving. Note that these functions will be
grayed-out. A grayed-out function indicates it is not
available when the vehicle is moving.
page 4-15 for more information.
page 4-19 for more information.
more information.
AA. FULL MAP Touch Screen Button. See “NAV” under
“Hard Keys” under Using the Navigation System
on page 4-13 for more information.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All functions are available when the vehicle is parked.
Do the following before driving:
{ CAUTION:
• Become familiar with the navigation system
operation, hard keys on the faceplate, and
touch-sensitive screen buttons of the navigation
system.
Avoid looking too long or too often at the moving
map on the navigation screen. This could cause a
crash and you or others can be injured or killed.
Use the turn-by-turn voice guidance directions
whenever possible.
• Set up the audio by presetting favorite stations,
setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers.
• Set up the navigation features before beginning
driving, such as entering an address or a preset
destination.
Use the navigation system to:
• Plan a route.
• Set up your phone numbers in advance so they can
be called easily with the press of a single button or
a single voice command (for navigation systems
equipped with phone capability).
• Select a destination using various methods and
choices.
• Follow turn-by-turn route and map guidance with
voice prompts, only if permitted by traffic laws,
controls, and conditions.
You should always be alert and obey traffic and
roadway laws and instructions, regardless of the
guidance from the navigation system. Because the
navigation system uses street map information that
does not include all traffic restrictions or the latest road
changes, it may suggest using a road that is now closed
for construction or a turn that is prohibited by signs
at the intersection. Because the system uses limited
information, you must always evaluate whether following
the system’s directions is safe and legal for the current
conditions.
{ CAUTION:
Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often
while using the navigation system could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death to you or others.
Focus your attention on driving.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the navigation system is turned on, a screen
may appear with the information below, and you must
read and acknowledge the information it contains.
After you acknowledge the start up information you
will be able to access the NAV (navigation) and DEST
(destination) functions. Once accessed, you can enter or
delete information in the navigation system or access
other functions. See instructions later in this section.
{ CAUTION:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others.
To help avoid a crash in which you or others could be
killed:
• Always concentrate on your driving first by keeping
your eyes and mind on the road, and your hands
on the wheel.
• Follow system directions only if permitted by traffic
laws, controls, and conditions.
Every fifty times the vehicle is started and the navigation
system is turned on, the Caution screen appears.
After reading the caution, select OK to load the map
DVD information. If OK is not selected, all hard keys
except for NAV (Navigation) and DEST (Destination)
can be accessed. You can also press the NAV hard
key to have this Caution screen appear.
• Before using this system, read the owner manual
and learn how it operates.
• Some system controls cannot be used the when
vehicle is moving.
When getting started, set the navigation system to your
preference or delete information you may have entered
using various options.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language — English/Metric
Limit Features While Driving
To change the language of the navigation screens,
for more information.
The navigation system may have this feature.
Touch the Limit Features While Driving screen button
to turn the ability to limit functions on and off while
driving. When this screen button is highlighted,
the following functions are limited while driving:
To change the navigation screens from English or
for more information.
• Music Navigator Scrolling
Deleting Personal Information
• Radio Category Scrolling
• Navigation Menu Scrolling and some functions
This navigation system can record and store personal
information such as names and addresses. Delete
this information when selling your vehicle or returning
a leased vehicle. See “Edit Address Book — Edit/View”
information from the address book.
page 4-62 for more information. See “From Map” under
Some functions will remain limited regardless of the
setting.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing Radio Station Presets
To set preset radio stations, do the following:
1. Press O to turn the system on.
Setting the Clock
The navigation system time and the analog clock
operate independently. Changing the time through
the navigation system does not change the time on
change the analog clock time.
2. Press the AUDIO hard key and select the desired
band (AM, FM, or XM (if equipped)).
To set the time for the navigation system:
3. Use the w (tuning) knob or the SEEK arrows to
tune to the desired station.
1. Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu
options, then press the CONFIG key repeatedly
until the time is selected or touch the time screen
button.
4. Press and hold one of the five preset screen
buttons, at the bottom of the screen, until a beep
is heard or if the station displays on the selected
preset button.
2. Press the Hours and Minutes − (minus) and
+ (plus) signs to decrease or to increase the time.
5. Repeat the steps for each preset.
See “Setting the Clock” under Configure Menu
on page 4-43 for more information.
See “Storing Radio Station Presets” under Navigation
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Once a state or province has been selected the City
name category is automatically selected for entry.
Entering an Address and Point
of Interest, and Storing Preset
Destinations
If five or less names are available, a list displays.
If more than five are available, the List screen button
displays a number. This number represents the
number of available cities. Select this button to
view the list and select a city.
Entering an Address
Enter a destination by inputting the city name first:
9. Once a city has been selected the Street name
category is automatically selected for entry.
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
If five or less streets are available for the selected
city, the system displays the list of streets. If more
than five streets are available the system displays
the alpha keyboard. Start entering the street name.
If five or less names are available, a list displays.
If more than five are available, the List screen button
displays a number. This button represents the
number of available streets. Select this button to
view the list and select a street.
2. Press O to turn the system on.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Installing the
information.
4. A caution may appear. Touch the OK screen button
to proceed.
5. Press the DEST hard key.
6. Press the 2 Address Entry screen button.
10. Once a street has been selected, select the
House # screen button to enter the house number.
The system displays the house number range
that is available for the street.
7. Select the state/province screen button, if needed,
to change the current state or province. A list of
all of the available states and provinces appear.
Select the state or province.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Select the Go screen button. A map screen, with
the destination marked appears.
6. Press the i Point of Interest screen button.
7. Select the state/province screen button, if needed,
to change the current state or province. A list of
all of the available states and provinces appear.
Select the state or province.
12. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest, or
Other). The system calculates and highlights the
route.
13. Select the Start Guidance screen button. You are
now ready to start your route.
8. Enter the specific title of the POI in the POI name
space (e.g. Washington Monument).
for more information.
If five or less names are available, a list displays.
If more than five are available, the List screen button
displays a number. This button represents the
number of available POIs. Select this button to
view the list.
Entering a Point of Interest (POI)
To set a destination by entering a Point of
Interest (POI), do the following:
9. Select the Go screen button next to the POI. A map
screen, with the destination marked appears.
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
10. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest, or
Other). The system calculates and highlights the
route.
2. Press O to turn the system on.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Installing the
information.
11. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
page 4-25 for more information.
4. A caution may appear. Touch the OK screen button
to proceed.
5. Press the DEST hard key.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Press and hold one of the screen buttons at the
bottom of the screen until the name appears in
the screen button on the display.
Storing Preset Destinations
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
The name appears in that preset destination screen
button and is now available to select from the
Destination Entry screen. See “Using Your Stored
Preset Destinations” next in this section to select
it as a destination.
2. Press O to turn the system on.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Installing the
information.
See “Adding or Changing Preset Destinations”
on how to add preset destinations.
4. A caution may appear. Touch the OK screen button
to proceed.
5. Press the DEST hard key.
Using Your Stored Preset Destinations
for more information on how to enter a destination.
These destinations are available for selection while
driving.
6. Press the DEST hard key, the Route screen
displays. Press the Final Destination or Stopover
screen button. The information screen displays
for that location. Press the Add to Address Book
screen button. The address book screen appears.
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
2. Press O to turn the system on.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Installing the
information.
7. Select the Name screen button. An alpha-keyboard
displays. Enter the name. Select the Back screen
button.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. A caution may appear. Touch the OK screen button
to proceed.
Guidance Volume
Adjust the volume of voice guidance prompts:
5. Press the DEST hard key.
1. Press the CONFIG hard key to enter the menu
options, then press the CONFIG key repeatedly
until Nav is selected or touch the Nav screen button.
6. Select one of the available preset destination
screen buttons. A map screen, with the destination
marked appears.
2. Press the Voice Prompt screen button.
7. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest, or
Other). The system calculates and highlights the
route.
3. Press the + (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons to
increase or to decrease the volume of the voice
prompts. The system responds with the adjusted
voice level.
8. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
page 4-43 for more information.
for more information.
Canceling Guidance
Cleaning the Display
Guidance is canceled once the final destination is
reached. To cancel guidance prior to arrival at the
final destination:
Use a soft clean cotton cloth dampened with clean
water.
1. Press the DEST hard key.
2. Press the Cancel Guidance screen button.
3. Press OK to confirm.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
w (Tune): Turn to go to the next or previous
radio station or disc track or chapter. See Navigation
Features and Controls
Using the Navigation System
This section presents basic information needed to
operate the navigation system.
Z (DVD Map Disc Eject): Press to eject the DVD
map disc. This button is located next to the upper disc
Use the hard keys located on the navigation system
along with the available touch-sensitive screen buttons
on the navigation screen to operate the system.
more information.
M (Load): Press to load CDs or audio/video DVDs.
page 4-78 for more information.
Once the vehicle is moving, various functions are
disabled to reduce driver distractions.
Z (CD/DVD Eject): Press to eject CDs or audio/video
DVDs. This button is located under the load button.
page 4-78 for more information.
Hard Keys
The following hard keys are located on the navigation
system:
M (Disc Up/Down): Press the up or down arrows to go
to the next or previous disc.
O / n (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system
on and off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume
to the audio system.
AUDIO: Press access the full Audio screen to change
AM, FM, XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if equipped),
CD/DVD, and auxiliary input. See “Audio” under
information.
Press and hold for more than two seconds to turn off
the navigation system, the Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE), and Rear Seat Audio (RSA). If the vehicle has
not been tuned off, the RSE and the RSA can be turned
back on by pressing this knob and continues play of
the last active source.
FAV (Favorite): Press to access the preset stations.
See “Storing Radio Station Presets” under Navigation
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 (Phone): Press to access calling through OnStar®.
on page 3-75 for more information.
screen in full map view. Selecting the audio tab splits the
screen between the map screen and the current audio
source screen menu. See “Audio” under Navigation
e (Sound): Press to access the Sound screen to
adjust bass, midrange, treble, and Digital Signal
Processing (DSP). See “Sound Menu” under Navigation
RPT (Navigation Repeat): Press to repeat the last
voice guidance prompt.
y © ¨ z (Seek): Press the seek arrows to seek
and scan radio stations, to seek tracks on a CD, and to
seek chapters on a DVD. See Navigation Audio System
on page 4-78 for more information.
DEST (Destination): Press to access the Destination
Entry screen to plan a destination. See Destination
on page 4-25 for more information.
CONFIG (Configure Menu): Press to adjust
features for sound, radio, navigation, and the display.
Touch-Sensitive Screen Buttons
Touch-sensitive screen buttons are located on the
screen. When a screen button has been selected,
a beep sounds. Screen buttons are highlighted when
a feature is available.
NAV (Navigation): Press to view your vehicle’s current
position on the map screen. Each press of this key cycles
through Full Map and the tab that displays the current
audio source (AM, FM, CD, etc.). Full Map displays the
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a name does not display after entry, it may need to
be entered differently or the map DVD disc may not
contain that information. See Database Coverage
Alpha-Numeric Keyboard
Letters of the alphabet, symbols, punctuation, and
numbers, when available, displays on the navigation
screen as an alpha or numeric keyboard. The alpha
keyboard displays when the system requires entry of
a city or street name.
Maps
This section includes basic information that you need to
know about the map database.
All characters are touch-sensitive screen buttons.
Touch a character to select it.
The maps are stored on a DVD. The United States,
Canada, and Puerto Rico are contained on one disc.
A-Y (Accent Alphabet): Select to enter letters with
accent symbols. This button may toggle to A-Z.
Detailed Areas
A-Z (Alphabet): Select to enter letters from the
alphabet. This button may toggle to A-Y.
Road network attributes are contained in the
map database for detailed areas. Attributes include
information such as street names, street address,
turn restrictions, etc. A detailed area includes all
major highways, service roads, and residential roads.
The detailed areas include points of interest (POI) such
as: restaurants, airports, banks, hospitals, police stations,
gas stations, tourist attractions, historical monuments,
etc. The map database may not include data for newly
constructed areas or map database corrections that are
completed after the production of the disc. The navigation
system provides full route guidance in the detailed map
areas.
0-9 (Numbers): Select to enter numbers.
U (Space): Select to enter a space between
characters or the words of a name.
Backspace: Select if an incorrect character has been
entered.
To make name entries easier, the system only highlights
the characters that can follow the last one entered.
For example, if a Z is entered, a T may not be available
for selection.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
navigation system. The sound is similar to that of a CD
player seeking through different tracks. This is normal
operation and may occur more frequently with the use
of XM NavTraffic.
Limited Guidance Areas
Any area that is not classified as detailed, is a limited
guidance area. Limited guidance streets are displayed on
the map but route guidance may not be given on these
streets. Some POI categories, such as the city center POI
category, and some street addresses are included in the
limited guidance areas.
Your dealer/retailer may have installed the map DVD.
If the map DVD was not installed, do the following
to load it:
1. Turn the ignition on.
The navigation system informs through voice prompts
when you are traveling into a limited guidance area
where route guidance is not available. The street maps
and the directional arrow displayed on the navigation
system can then be used to determine the remaining
route to your destination.
2. Press the O (power) knob to turn the navigation
system on or press the NAV, DEST, or MENU
hard keys. If the MENU hard key is selected, press
and hold until the NAV screen is active, or select
the NAV tab manually.
3. Load the map DVD partway into the slot located
just below the screen. The system will pull it in.
Installing the DVD Map Disc
When a DVD Map Disc is installed, noise from the disc
may occur, this is normal system operation.
4. Touch the OK screen button to agree to the Caution
screen, if it appears. If the map is in split screen
mode, you must push the NAV tab button to get
the full map screen.
The navigation system in this vehicle uses a DVD to
store map information. When the system loads data from
the disc, you may hear a very slight buzz sound from the
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Map Disc Messages
Handling the DVD Map Disc
If Disc Read Error appears on the display and/or the
map disc comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
When handling the DVD map disc, be careful of the
following:
• Handle the disc very carefully to avoid
• If the map disc was installed into the CD slot.
See “Installing the DVD Map Disc” previously.
contamination or flaws. Signals may not read out
properly if the disc gets contaminated or flawed.
• It is very hot, when the temperature returns to
normal, the map disc should play.
• If the disc gets soiled, use a soft cloth to gently wipe
it out from the center of the disc to the outside.
Do not use photographic record cleaner, solvents,
or other cleaners.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the map disc should play.
• Do not use the disc to rest on while writing or
drawing using any writing utensil or attach a seal
to any of the sides or the disc.
• The map disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
• Do not keep the disc in direct sunlight, high
temperatures, or humidity.
Ejecting the DVD Map Disc
• After using the disc, place it back into the
original case.
Z (DVD Map Disc Eject): Press to eject the DVD
map disc. This button is located next to the upper
disc slot.
Map Adjustments
The system lets you adjust the scale of view on the
map. Also, as you drive, the map scrolls automatically
based on the direction of travel.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move your finger in any direction on the map screen
and the map continues to scroll in that direction until
you remove your finger from the screen.
Map Scales
+ / − (Zoom In/Zoom Out): Touch the zoom in or out
screen buttons or the scale on the bar to change the
level of map detail. The scale appears on the screen
once the zoom in or zoom out screen buttons are
selected. The system adjusts the map accordingly.
The scale of a map can range from 1/32 mi. (50 m) to
256 mi. (400 km). To change English or metric, see
information.
If scrolling while the vehicle is in P (Park), the system
scrolls initially at a slower rate. It increases if you
continue touching the map screen.
If scrolling while the vehicle is in motion, there is
one scroll speed and a limited distance to scroll. Keep
touching the map screen to scroll for a longer distance.
If you have used the scroll feature to scroll the map and
the vehicle icon disappears off the screen, press the
NAV (Navigation) key to return to the current vehicle
location on the map.
Scrolling the Map
Touch anywhere on the
map screen and the scroll
symbol appears. Use this
feature to scroll across
the map.
The scroll feature on the map can be used to set
a destination. See “From Map” under Destination
on page 4-25 for more information.
While scrolling on the map, press the GO screen button
to calculate the route from the current position to the
destination mark.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The stopover symbol
displays on the map after
a stopover has been
added to the route.
Symbols
The following symbols are the most common symbols
that appear on a map screen.
The vehicle is shown as
this symbol. It indicates the
current position and the
direction the vehicle is
traveling on the map.
The stopover symbols are numbered one through three,
depending on how many stopovers have been set.
The distance to destination
symbol indicates the
distance to the final
destination.
The destination symbol
appears on the map,
after a route has been
planned, marking the
final destination.
This symbol appears when the time to the destination is
not available or while you are scrolling on the map.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The distance and time
to destination symbol
indicates the distance
and the estimated time
remaining to the final
destination, depending
on the option selected.
The north up symbol
indicates the map with
North Up, known as
North Up mode.
While in North Up mode, the vehicle icon follows the
north direction on the map regardless of which direction
the vehicle is traveling. Select this screen symbol to
switch between North Up, Heading Up, and 3–D view
modes.
The straight line to
distance symbol indicates
the straight-line distance
to the destination.
The heading up symbol
indicates that the vehicle
is traveling up on the
map and is known
as Heading Up mode.
The shaded triangle indicates the North direction.
While in Heading Up mode the direction at the top of the
screen and the way the vehicle icon is heading indicates
the direction the vehicle is traveling. Select this screen
symbol to switch between Heading Up, North Up, and
3–D view modes.
This symbol appears before you start driving on the
route or if on a road where navigation guidance cannot
be given.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three-dimensional (3–D) view mode changes the
appearance of the map display to a road level view.
Displaying Points of Interest (POI) on the
Map Screen
The No GPS symbol
appears when the
vehicle is acquiring or
not receiving a Global
Positioning System (GPS)
satellite signal.
Select the POI screen
button to display or delete
POI icons from the map.
more information.
Displaying POI icons on the map shows where POIs
(e.g. restaurants, gas stations, etc.) are located.
This screen appears after selecting the POI screen
button.
Select the Mark screen
button to store the location
on the screen in the
address book.
The system automatically stores the point in the
address book. See “Adding Destinations to the
for more information.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POI Close to:
1. Once a category has been selected, touch this
button to display the list of available POIs for the
selected POI category. The list provides the POI
icon, the name, the direction, and the distance to
the POI from the vehicle’s current position.
1. Select one of the POI categories to display the POI
icon at the top of the map screen. Select the POI
category again to delete the POI icon.
2. Up to five categories can display on the map
screen.
3. Press the Show POI screen button to add more
POI icons.
2. Use the scroll arrows to move up and down the list.
3. Use the sorting screen buttons: Dist (distance),
Icon, Name, and on Route as needed.
More: Select to view more POI categories.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Go: Select this screen button, next to the desired POI,
to make this POI a destination or a stopover.
List all Categories: Select to list all POIs sorted
alphabetically.
Select a POI name to receive information about the
POI. From this screen you can select: Address Book,
Go, Map, or Call (if Bluetooth® or OnStar® personal
calling is activated).
Delete: To delete a specific POI category, select the
category.
Clear All: Select this screen button to clear all selected
POI categories.
Address Book: Press to add this POI to the address
for information on editing address book entries.
Driving on a Route
When driving on a routed destination, the map screen
automatically displays the next maneuver.
Go: Select to make this POI a destination or a stopover.
Map: Select to display the map showing the location
of the POI.
The pop-up displays the
next maneuver direction
and the distance from it.
Call: Select to dial the phone number using your
Bluetooth® phone (if “paired” with the vehicle) or the
OnStar HandsFree Calling system. For more information
For more information about OnStar HandsFree
calling, see the OnStar Owner Guide.
OK: Select to display the map screen.
Show POI: Select to display or remove the POI icons
from the map screen.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3–D Lane Guidance
When approximately 1/4 mi (400 m) from the next
maneuver, the screen displays the name and a detailed
view of it.
Some major metropolitan areas may include a 3–D lane
guidance feature for highway exits and junctions.
This feature gives you an enhanced representation of the
exits and junctions on the route. Cities that include this
feature are New York, Los Angeles, Chicago, Detroit,
and San Francisco, and may also include Philadelphia,
Washington D.C., and other major highway junctions.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Mode
Destination
Press the DEST key to access the Destination Entry
screen. From this screen, you can select from several
options to plan a route by entering destination points.
This dual screen symbol
displays when the screen
is in dual mode.
Dual mode displays the route on half of the screen and
a maneuver or Interstate Exit list on the other half.
The Interstate Exit list advises of approaching exits.
Press this button to switch between dual screen and
full screen which displays the entire route.
Auto Reroute
When a destination is set but is off the planned route,
the system automatically plans a new route and begins
to reroute. The new route is highlighted on the screen.
To enter a destination, choose from one of the following
destination entry methods:
Address Entry
2 Address Entry: Enter either a city or street to
use the address entry destination method.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Once a state or province has been selected the
City name category is automatically selected
for entry.
Enter the City Name or touch the Last 5 Cities
screen button.
The Last 5 Cities screen displays a list of the last
five city names that had been entered. Select a city
from the list and it appears in the City name area.
If using the alpha keyboard, finish entering the
city name. If five or less names are available,
a list displays. If more than five are available,
the List screen button displays a number. This
number represents the number of available cities.
Select this button to view the list and select a city.
5. Once a city has been selected the Street name
category is automatically selected for entry.
To enter a destination by inputting the city name first:
1. Press the DEST hard key.
Start entering the street name. If five or less names
are available, a list displays. If more than five are
available, the List screen button displays a number.
This number represents the number of available
streets. Select this button to view the list.
2. Select the 2 screen button.
3. Select the state/province screen button, if needed,
to change the current state or province. A list of
all of the available states and provinces appear.
Select the state or province.
6. Once a street has been selected, press the
House # screen button to enter the house number.
The system displays the house number range
that is available for the street.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Select the Go screen button. The map screen, with
the destination marked displays.
If using the alpha keyboard, finish entering the
street name. If five or less names are available,
a list displays. If more than five are available,
the List screen button displays a number.
This number represents the number of available
streets. Select this button to view the list and
select a street.
8. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest,
or Other). The system calculates and highlights
the route.
9. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
5. Once a street has been selected, select the
House # screen button to enter the house number.
The system displays the house number range
that is available for the street.
See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in this
section for more information.
To enter a destination by entering the street name first:
1. Press the DEST hard key.
6. Once the house number is selected, the city name
automatically populates. If there is more than one
city available for selection, a list of cities display.
Select the city.
2. Select the 2 screen button.
3. Select the state/province screen button, if needed,
to change the current state or province. A list of
all of the available states and provinces appear.
Select the state or province.
7. Select the Go screen button. The map screen, with
the destination marked displays.
8. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest,
or Other). The system calculates and highlights
the route.
4. Select the Street screen button and start entering
the street name or touch the Last 5 Streets screen
button.
9. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
If the street name is common, the city might need
to be entered first.
See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in this
section for more information.
The Last 5 Streets screen displays a list of the last
five street names that had been entered. Select
a street from the list and it appears in the Street
name area.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enter a destination by entering a cross street:
1. Press the DEST hard key.
5. Once a street has been selected, select the Cross
Street screen button and start entering the cross
street name. If five or less names are available,
a list displays. If more than five are available,
the List screen button displays a number.
This number represents the number of available
streets. Select this button to view the list and
select a street.
2. Select the 2 screen button.
3. Select the state/province screen button, if needed,
to change the current state or province. A list of all
of the available states and provinces appear.
Select the state or province.
6. Select the Go screen button. The map screen, with
the destination marked displays.
4. Select the Street screen button and start entering
the street name or touch the Last 5 Streets screen
button.
7. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest,
or Other). The system calculates and highlights
the route.
If the street name is common, the city might need
to be entered first.
8. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
The Last 5 Streets screen displays a list of the
last five street names that had been entered.
Select a street from the list and it appears in
the Street name area.
See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in this
section for more information.
If using the alpha keyboard, finish entering the
street name. If five or less names are available,
a list displays. If more than five are available,
the List screen button displays a number.
This number represents the number of available
streets. Select this button to view the list and
select a street.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the point of interest destination entry method by
entering the name:
Point of Interest (POI)
The Point of Interest (POI) destination entry method lets
you select a destination from the POI list.
1. Press the DEST hard key.
2. Select the i screen button.
3. Select the state/province screen button, if needed,
to change the current state or province. A list of
all of the available states and provinces appear.
Select the state or province.
4. Enter the POI name.
If five or less names are available, a list displays.
If more than five are available, the List screen button
displays a number. This number represents the
number of available POIs. Select this button to
view the list.
5. Select the Go screen button next to the POI.
The map screen, with the destination marked
displays.
i Point of Interest: Touch to access the POI (Point
of Interest) screen. From this screen you have two
options to select/enter a destination. Enter the name
using the alpha keyboard or select a category from the
category list.
6. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest,
or Other). The system calculates and highlights
the route.
7. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in this
section for more information.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the point of interest destination entry method by
selecting a category:
Address Book
The address book entry method lets you select a
destination by selecting an address that has been stored
in the address book.
1. Press the DEST hard key.
2. Select the i screen button.
3. Select the Browse POI Categories screen button to
view the list of POI categories.
4. Select a category.
The system displays available POI names in the
selected category.
5. Select the Go screen button next to the POI.
The map screen, with the destination marked
displays.
6. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest,
or Other). The system calculates and highlights
the route.
7. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in this
section for more information.
g Address Book: Touch to access the Address
Book screen. From this screen an address that already
exists can be selected as the destination.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the address book entry method:
1. Press the DEST hard key.
Previous Destination
The previous destination entry method lets you select a
destination from a list of previous destination points.
2. Select the g screen button.
A list of the address book addresses display.
3. Select the Go screen button next to the destination.
The map screen, with the destination marked
displays.
4. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest,
or Other). The system calculates and highlights
the route.
5. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in this
section for more information.
See “Adding Destinations to the Address Book”
later in this section.
/ Previous Destination: Touch to access the
Previous Destination screen. The system stores up
to 20 points that have been previously entered. As new
destinations are entered, the system automatically
deletes the oldest destinations and adds the new
destinations.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the previous destination entry method:
1. Press the DEST hard key.
From Map
This destination entry method allows you to select a
destination by scrolling on the map.
2. Select the / screen button.
3. Select a previous destination from the list. Use the
arrow to the right of the destination to view the entire
destination name as necessary. Use the scroll
arrows to the left to scroll through the list.
4. Select the Go screen button next to the destination.
The map screen, with the destination marked
displays.
5. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest, or
Other). The system calculates and highlights the
route.
6. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in this
section for more information.
) From Map: Touch to enter the From Map
destination entry method.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use this destination entry method:
1. Press the DEST hard key.
Map Coordinates
The coordinates destination entry method lets you
select a destination by entering latitude and longitude
coordinates.
2. Select the ) screen button. A map screen displays
with the scrolling symbol.
3. Use the 0 / 1 screen buttons and touch on the
map to find the area that you would like to select
as your destination.
Pressing/holding and dragging your finger on the
map activates fast scrolling.
4. Press/touch once on the area that you would like to
set as your destination.
The map screen displays the address information.
5. Select the Go screen button. The map screen, with
the destination marked displays.
6. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest,
or Other). The system calculates and highlights
the route.
Map Coordinates: Touch to access the Coordinates
Entry screen.
7. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in this
section for more information.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the coordinates destination entry method:
1. Press the DEST hard key.
Preset Destination
The preset destination entry method lets you set a
destination by selecting from one of five previously stored
destinations. Besides voice tagged destinations, these
are the only destinations available to set while the vehicle
is moving. If a destination is not set for one of the screen
buttons, the button is dimmed and not available for use.
See “Adding or Changing Preset Destinations” later in
this section for information on how to add a preset
destination.
2. Select the From Map screen button.
3. Select the Map Coordinates screen button.
4. Select Latitude and select either N (north) or
S (south) to enter the direction of the latitude
coordinate. Enter the numeric portion of the
latitude coordinate.
5. Select Longitude and select either E (east) or
W (west) next to enter the direction of the longitude
coordinate. Enter the numeric portion of the
longitude coordinate.
6. Once both coordinates are entered, select the Go
screen button. The map screen, with the destination
marked displays.
7. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest, or
Other). The system calculates and highlights the
route.
8. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in this
section for more information.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the preset destination entry method:
1. Press the DEST hard key.
2. Select the desired preset destination screen button.
The screen buttons are labeled with the name that
was selected for the destination when it was stored.
The map screen, with the destination marked
displays.
3. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest,
or Other). The system calculates and highlights
the route.
4. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
See “Getting Started on Your Route” later in this
section for more information.
Destination Map Screen
Map Destination Screen Functions
OnStar® Destination Download
If the map screen is used to show destination, it will
have map screen capabilities such as Go, Mark, Zoom,
Scroll, etc. The address is shown at the top of the
screen.
OnStar® Destination Download (if equipped) is a
service available for OnStar* subscribers that makes
operating your navigation system much simpler. It allows
subscribers to request and receive navigation assistance
on-the-go.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using OnStar® Destination Download
• Select Go, the navigation system calculates
route(s). Select a route (i.e. Shortest Route),
and Start Guidance.
Press the blue OnStar button and an Advisor can
locate a point-of-interest or an address and download
the necessary information or coordinates to your
navigation system. Once the destination is downloaded,
the navigation system will search for the address in the
mapping disc’s database. When the address is found, it
will be shown on your navigation system’s screen along
with the buttons described below.
• Select Map, the navigation system displays the
Destination Map Screen.
• Select Call, the navigation system initiates a
call to your destination with your Bluetooth phone
(if available) or OnStar Hands-Free Calling
(if minutes are available).
• Select Add to Address Book, the navigation system
copies the downloaded destination to the address
book and displays the new address book entry.
• Select Back, the navigation system cancels your
OnStar Destination Download and returns to the
previous screen. The downloaded address will not
be added to the previous destinations.
OnStar Download Screen
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Notes regarding OnStar Destination
Download:
Route Guidance Not Active
If an OnStar destination is downloaded while route
guidance is not active, the navigation system displays
an OnStar Destination Download Screen and operations
will continue as outlined in the Using OnStar Destination
Download section:
• If the navigation system is turned off when the
destination download is attempted, the navigation
system will automatically turn on and display the
OnStar Destination Download Screen. The radio
will remain on after the download occurs.
Route Guidance Active
• If OnStar downloads a destination and the address is
not found in the mapping disc’s database and routing
by coordinates is not available, the Go and Map
buttons gray out and routing will not be available.
Press the blue OnStar button for further assistance.
If OnStar downloads a destination while route
guidance is already active, the navigation system
adds the downloaded destination as the next waypoint in
the existing route. All features such as Call and Add to
Address Book will be available for the waypoint. Refer
to the section on Waypoints for more information.
• The Call button grays out when there is no phone
number available for your destination and while
connected to OnStar.
Previous Destinations
Previous OnStar Destination Downloads are
saved under Previous Destinations in the navigation
system where they can be accessed or saved to the
address book.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Map Destination Screen Functions
Getting Started on Your Route
If the map screen is used to show destination, it will
have map screen capabilities such as Go, Mark, Zoom,
Scroll, etc. The address is shown at the top of the
screen.
Once a destination has been entered, there are several
functions that can be performed. Press the DEST hard
key to access the Route screen.
Destination Map Screen
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn List
Turn List: Touch to view the list of turn maneuvers for
the entire route and to avoid turns on the route.
Route Preview: Select to preview the entire route in
either direction.
t (Reverse Skip): Select to go back to the start point
or previous stopover.
r / q (Scroll Arrows): Touch the up and down
arrows to scroll through the list of maneuvers.
q / r (Reverse Scroll): Select to scroll to the start
point or previous stopover. The t (reverse skip) button
Avoid: Touch this screen button, next to the adjacent
street name, to avoid the maneuver.
changes to a fast reverse screen button.
The map screen displays. The route recalculates
without this maneuver.
j (Pause): Select to pause the route preview, while in
reverse or fast forward scroll.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add Stopover
r / [ (Fast Forward Scroll): Select to scroll to the
next stopover or to the final destination. The u (fast
forward skip) button changes to a fast speed fast forward.
u (Fast Forward Skip): Select to go to the next
stopover or to the final destination.
Detour
Detour: Select this screen button from the Route
screen, then select to detour 1 mile, 3 miles, or 5 miles
(1 km, 3 km, 5 km) around the current route. This can
also be selected to detour the whole route if necessary.
The detour option is only available while driving on a
current planned route.
Voice Volume
Add Stopover: Select this screen button from the
Route screen. This feature allows up to three stopovers
to be added to the current route between the start point
and final destination. Once a stopover has been added,
the points can be edited or deleted.
Select this screen button from the Route screen to turn
voice guidance on or off and to change the volume
of voice prompts. See “Nav” under Configure Menu
on page 4-43 for more information.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To add a stopover:
To delete a stopover from the current route:
1. Press the DEST hard key.
1. Press the DEST hard key.
2. Select the Add Stopover screen button. This button
only appears if a route has been calculated.
2. Select the Delete screen button for the desired
stopover to delete.
3. Using the desired method of entering a destination,
enter the stopover. See “Destination” previously for
more information.
3. The system displays a pop-up confirmation
message. Touch Yes to delete the stopover;
touch No to cancel this operation.
4. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest,
or Other). The system calculates and highlights
the route.
4. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest, or
Other). The system calculates and highlights the
route.
5. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
5. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
6. To add the second and third stopovers, press the
DEST hard key, then select the Add screen button,
where the next waypoint should appear on the
route.
Suspend Guidance
Press this screen button, from the Route screen, to put
the current route on hold.
7. Select the route preference (Fastest, Shortest, or
Other). The system calculates and highlights the
route.
Resume Guidance
Press this screen button, from the Route screen, to
resume guidance on the current route.
8. Select the Start Guidance screen button. The route
is now ready to be started.
Cancel Guidance
Press this screen button, from the Route screen, to
cancel the current route.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Destinations to the
Address Book
Adding or Changing Preset
Destinations
There are two ways to add a destination to the
address book:
This feature allows additions or changes one of five
preset destinations. When a destination has been added
as a preset destination, it is available to select from
the Destination Entry screen. See “Preset Destination”
previously for information on how to select a preset
destination as a final destination.
• To add the current vehicle position to the
address book, press the Mark screen button
from the map screen. The system automatically
saves the current vehicle information in the address
book. When scrolling on the map the Mark screen
button automatically adds the current scrolled
position information in the address book.
To store the current vehicle position as a preset
destination:
1. Select the Mark screen button from the map screen
to add the current vehicle position to the address
book. The Address Book screen appears.
• Press the Add to Address Book screen button
when available on POI information screens,
Destination Entry screens, or POI screens.
The system automatically saves this information
in the address book.
2. Select the Name screen button. An alpha-keyboard
displays. Enter the name. Press the OK screen
button then the Back screen button to return to
the address book information screen.
information on editing address book entries.
3. Press and hold one of the buttons at the bottom of
the screen until the name appears in that preset
destination screen button. It is now available
to select from the Destination Entry screen.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store an address book entry as a preset destination:
1. Select the CONFIG hard key.
Configure Menu
2. Select the Nav screen button or press the CONFIG
key until Nav is selected or touch the Nav screen
button.
3. Select the Edit/View screen button.
4. Select the address book entry to be stored as the
preset destination. Select the Name screen button
to add a name, if needed.
5. Press and hold one of the buttons at the bottom of
the screen until the name appears in that preset
destination screen button. It is now available
to select from the Destination Entry screen.
Press the CONFIG (Configure) hard key to adjust
several of the system’s features and preferences.
The last selected CONFIG screen is the screen that
displays: Sound, Radio, Nav (navigation), Display,
or Time.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound
Nav (Navigation)
Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu
options, then press the CONFIG key repeatedly
until Sound is selected or touch the Sound screen
button to make speaker and DSP (Digital Signal
Processing) adjustments. See “Sound Menu” under,
information.
Radio
Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu
options, then press the CONFIG key repeatedly
until Radio is selected or touch the Radio screen
button to make changes for radio information displayed,
preset pages, XM™ categories, and Bose® AudioPilot®.
See “Radio Menu” under, Navigation Audio System
on page 4-62 for more information.
Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu
options, then press the CONFIG key repeatedly
until Nav is selected or touch the Nav screen button.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Allow toll road: This feature allows the system to use
toll roads when calculating a planned route.
Voice Prompt
Voice Prompt: Touch the Voice Prompt screen button
to change the volume of the voice prompts or to turn
voice guidance on and off.
Allow ferry: This feature allows the system to use
ferries when calculating a planned route.
Allow time and seasonal restricted road: This
feature allows the system to use time restricted and
seasonal roads when calculating a planned route.
Volume: Touch the + (plus) or − (minus) screen
buttons to increase or to decrease the volume of the
voice prompts. The system will respond with the
adjusted voice level.
Edit Address Book — How to Add
Voice Guidance: Touch the On or Off screen buttons
to turn voice instructions on and off while traveling
on a planned route.
To add an address to the address book, see “Adding
page 4-25.
Route Preference
Touch the Route Preference screen button to change
route options when the system calculates a route.
Allow Major Roads: This feature allows the system to
use major roads when calculating a planned route.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To add or change the phone number of an address
book entry:
Edit Address Book — Edit/View
To edit the name of an address book:
1. Select the CONFIG hard key.
1. Select the CONFIG hard key.
2. Select the NAV screen button.
2. Select the NAV screen button.
3. Select the Edit/View Address Book screen button.
4. Select the address book entry to change.
3. Select the Edit/View Address Book screen button.
4. Select the Address book entry.
5. Touch the Phone # screen button and use the
numeric keyboard to input or change the phone
number.
6. Touch the OK screen button to save your changes,
then touch the Back screen button to return to the
Address Book information screen.
To change the map icon of an address book entry:
1. Select the CONFIG hard key.
2. Select the NAV screen button.
3. Select the Edit/View Address Book screen button.
4. Select the address book entry to change.
5. Select the Icon screen button.
6. Select an icon from the list.
5. Touch the Name screen button and use the alpha
keyboard to edit or add the name.
To add a voice tag to an address book entry:
1. Select the CONFIG hard key.
6. Touch the OK screen button to save your changes,
then touch the Back screen button to return to the
Address Book information screen.
2. Select the NAV screen button.
3. Select the Edit/View Address Book screen button.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Select the Add Voice Tag screen button.
Map Database Information
5. The system will ask for you to state the name.
You will have four seconds to state the name.
The system will respond back with the name and
prompt you to repeat the name for confirmation.
To delete an address book entry:
1. Select the CONFIG hard key.
2. Select the NAV screen button.
3. Select the Edit/View Address Book screen button.
4. Select the address book entry to delete.
5. Press the Delete screen button to delete the
address book entry.
6. A confirmation pop-up will display. Select Ok to
delete; select Cancel to cancel the operation.
Touch the Map Database Information screen button to
view the coverage areas of the map DVD.
To delete the entire address book:
1. Select the CONFIG hard key.
2. Select the NAV screen button.
3. Select the Edit/View Address Book screen button.
4. A list of all the address book entries will display.
Press and hold the Clear All screen button.
5. A confirmation pop-up will display. Select Ok to
delete; select Cancel to cancel the operation.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Mode
Traffic Options
To turn the Off-road mode on or off, do the following:
1. Press the CONFIG hard key.
2. Press the Nav screen button.
Read the following Options descriptions to understand
how the XM NavTraffic™ operates.
XM NavTraffic™ (USA and Canada)
3. Press the Off-Road mode screen button. The button
will be highlighted when the feature is on.
Vehicles with the navigation system have an
XM NavTraffic™ receiver. XM NavTraffic™ is a
subscription service provided via XM™ Satellite
Radio. XM NavTraffic™ provides real-time traffic
information fully integrated to the navigation system
to display current traffic conditions for a driver’s chosen
route. XM NavTraffic™ allows drivers to make the most
informed, timesaving routing decisions.
When the off-road mode is turned on, the navigation
system will show the path being traveled by the vehicle
when not on a marked road. This path will be a simulation
since the map database coverage will not have these
roads on the DVD. This path will be stored in the
navigation system’s memory, see “Previous Destination”
If the Traffic touch screen button is pressed or if
an attempt is made to turn on the traffic display in the
Navigation Setup Menu without a subscription, a Caution
screen displays indicating that XM traffic is not activated.
See “Off-Road Driving” in the Index of your vehicle’s
owner manual for more information about off-road
driving.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM NavTraffic™ currently broadcasts the traffic
information for many markets nationally, and the
service may be available in more cities in the future.
Visit xmnavtraffic.com for more details on local
coverage.
A service fee is required in order to receive the
XM NavTraffic™ service.
Turning XM NavTraffic™ On and Off
To turn traffic on or off:
1. Press the CONFIG hard key, then press the
CONFIG key repeatedly until Nav is selected
or press the Nav screen button.
2. Touch the Traffic Options button.
Three types of traffic information for major roadways are
displayed on the navigation system:
3. Touch the Traffic button. This button is highlighted
when it is active.
• Unscheduled traffic incident data, such as accidents
and disabled vehicles
Selecting Alert for Approaching Traffic Events
enables the system to show a pop-up screen that
notifies of possible traffic issues ahead.
• Scheduled traffic incident data, such as road
construction and road closures
When this feature is highlighted, while traveling
on a route, accidents located on the route are
indicated and can be avoided.
• Traffic flow information (rate of speed data)
Traffic information is delivered to the vehicle by the
XM™ Radio satellites. XM NavTraffic™ makes it possible
for the navigation system to provide continuously updated
traffic information personalized for a driver’s needs.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traffic Icon
Condition
Traffic Status Icon
The Traffic Icon appears on the Traffic Tab, next to the
word Traffic, when traffic is found in the local area.
Traffic events are in the
area, but none are on
route.
The Traffic Icon has three different condition displays.
These are:
Traffic events are on route.
Condition
Traffic Status Icon
• No XM NavTraffic™
subscription.
• No Traffic is found in
the local area.
• The Traffic Feature is
turned off.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To view the traffic condition location and information on
the map:
Locations and Information of Traffic
Conditions
The system may take some time to sort the
information. The list of traffic conditions display
in the order of distance from the vehicle, up to
approximately 75 mi (125 km). With a route planned,
the system defaults to list traffic events on your route.
Without a route planned, if travelling on a major
interstate, the system lists events immediately ahead
on the interstate first. Then all other traffic events follow.
Not all traffic conditions may be listed.
1. Press the NAV key, then press the NAV key
repeatedly until Traffic is selected, or touch the
Traffic screen button. A list of traffic conditions with
distance from the vehicle’s current position displays.
An arrow may appear before the distance.
The arrow indicates the distance is a straight line
distance and it shows the direction of the event
from the current vehicle’s position. If no arrow
appears, the distance indicates how far the event
is ahead on current Interstate highway or route.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the vehicle is moving, the traffic list up or down,
scroll arrows are limited to a maximum of four pages.
No more than four pages of traffic events may be
viewed while the vehicle is moving.
Options
2. Select a traffic condition to get more detailed
information of the event.
Select the Options screen button. A Traffic Options
menu displays. Select the desired traffic related option.
Traffic: Select to enable or disable the traffic function.
Show Traffic ICONS: Select to display traffic icons
on the map screen. This function allows which traffic
information displays.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Green indicates normal traffic flow with average
speed above 45 mph.
• Orange indicates construction.
Traffic flow data arrows display on the map when scaled
up to eight miles.
Closed Road, Traffic Delays, Incidents, and
Advisories — These four touch screen buttons
are used to select the traffic event ICONS that
appear on the map screens.
Alert for Approaching Traffic Events: When On,
if an approaching traffic event is within the alert range,
one of two traffic alert pop-up screens display:
• With no route planned, while on expressways,
Approaching Traffic Event without Avoid screen
displays.
Traffic Flow Status — This touch screen button is
used to enable or disable the green, yellow, red and
orange arrows shown beside the roads and used
to show the traffic flow or extent of a traffic event.
• With route planned, Traffic Event on Route screen
displays.
• Black indicates a closed road segment
If the Alert for Approaching Traffic Events is Off, the
alert pop-up screen does not display.
• Red indicates significantly impaired traffic flow with
average speed of less than 25 mph.
• Yellow indicates slightly impaired traffic flow with
average speed between 25 and 45 mph.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Route
Refresh
Select the On Route touch screen button to display all
events ahead on the current active route. If no traffic
events have been reported on route, No Traffic Events
Reported On route displays.
Select the Refresh touch screen button to update the
screen with all of the latest traffic events, miles, etc.
Traffic events update approximately every two minutes.
To update the events immediately, press the Refresh
touch screen button.
Scrolling to Traffic Events on the Map
Name
Select the Name touch screen button to display traffic
events in the order of distance. The closest event
is shown first.
While scrolling the map, traffic condition icons may
appear. Traffic events may appear up to 75 mi (125 km)
from your current position. To receive information about
the traffic condition, place the cross hairs over the traffic
condition icon.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After selecting the INFO (information) screen button,
the type of traffic condition, the street name, and a
description of the traffic condition displays. See “Scrolling
Category 3, Incidents:
p (Alert): Object in the roadway, disabled vehicle, or
dangerous road conditions.
To display traffic events in another state or a great
distance away, scroll to the desired area, and then
stop scrolling. Wait for the traffic to update. It may
take up to two minutes before traffic in this new area
can be received and displayed.
t (Accident): Roadway obstructed due to accident.
s (Road Works): Delayed traffic due to construction.
Category 4, Advisories:
Traffic Event Display Categories
j / r (Road Condition): Delayed or stopped traffic,
lane blocked or closed due to a road condition.
The following are traffic condition categories and
symbols that can appear on the display:
k (Weather): Heavy rain, snow, or fog weather
condition.
Category 1, Road Closure:
q (Road Closed): Road and/or ramps closed.
m (Parking): Available parking area.
Category 2, Traffic Delayed:
l (Information): Special event, general information, or
warning.
o (Stopped Traffic): Traffic stopped, stop and go
traffic, delayed and congested traffic.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Detailed Traffic Event Screens
Back, Map, More, and Avoid
These buttons have common functions across all three
Detailed Traffic Event screens.
Back: Press to return to the previous screen.
Map: If available, press to display the related traffic
event on the map.
Traffic Event Screen
The detailed Traffic Event screens are used to display
additional details of a traffic event condition. This screen
may display if:
• Scrolling to an event on the map and then
pressing INFO.
Map Traffic Event Icon with Back Screen
• Selecting a traffic event listed on the Traffic Event
List screen.
More: Press to display more of the traffic event
description, if the whole event does not fit in the
given display.
The Traffic Event screen may display when approaching
a traffic event.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid: This button is used to avoid the location of an
event on the route. If selected, a new route is calculated
and the related traffic event is avoided. After the new
route has been calculated, the navigation system
goes to the full map screen and shows the new route.
Display
The Avoid button is only available if the event is on
the route ahead.
Traffic Voice Prompts
The traffic voice prompts are part of the current
navigation voice prompts. If the navigation voice prompts
are turned off, all traffic prompts are also turned off.
If the voice prompts are on, whenever an Alert for
Approaching Traffic is displayed, the system gives
the related voice prompt. The content of the voice
prompt depends on actual traffic event data.
Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu
options, then press the CONFIG key repeatedly
until Display is selected or touch the Display screen
button.
The RPT (Repeat) hard key is for navigation traffic
maneuvers only. It is not used to repeat traffic prompts.
During a traffic voice prompt, if RPT is pressed, the
current prompt playback cancels.
Traffic prompts are disabled during OnStar® or Voice
Recognition activity.
Display Off
Touch this screen button to turn the display off.
Press any hard key to view the display.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto (Automatic): Touch this screen button for the
system to automatically adjust the screen background
depending on exterior lighting conditions.
Brightness/Contrast/Mode
Night: Touch this screen button and the system makes
the map background darker.
Day: Touch this screen button and the system makes
the map background brighter.
Setting the Clock
The navigation system time and the analog clock
operate independently. Changing the time through
the navigation system does not change the time on
change the analog clock time.
Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu
options, then press the CONFIG key repeatedly until
the time is selected or touch the time screen button.
Touch this screen button to change the brightness,
contrast, and mode of the display.
] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus) or − (minus)
screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness
of the screen.
Hours: Press the − (minus) or + (plus) signs to
decrease or increase the hours.
Minutes: Press the − (minus) or + (plus) signs to
decrease or increase the minutes.
_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus) or − (minus) screen
buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the
screen.
12/24 Format: Select the 12 screen button for standard
time; select the 24 screen button for military time.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system may not be available or interferences may
occur if any of the following are true:
Global Positioning System (GPS)
The navigation system determines the position of the
vehicle by using satellite signals, various vehicle signals,
and map data.
• Signals are obstructed by tall buildings, trees, large
trucks, or a tunnel.
• Objects are located on the front dash of the vehicle.
• Satellites are being repaired or improved.
At times, other interferences such as the satellite
condition, road configuration, the condition of the
vehicle and/or other circumstances can interfere with
the navigation system’s ability to determine the accurate
position of the vehicle.
• After-market glass tinting has been applied to the
vehicle’s windshield.
Notice: Do not apply after-market glass tinting
to the vehicle’s windows. Glass tinting interferes
with the system’s ability to receive GPS signals
and causes the system to malfunction. The window
might have to be replaced to correct the problem.
This would not be covered by the warranty.
The GPS shows the current position of the vehicle using
signals sent by the GPS Satellites of the United States
Department of Defense. When the vehicle is not
receiving signals from the satellites, a symbol appears
For more information if the GPS is not functioning
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Vehicle changes directions more than once, or when
the vehicle is turning on a turn table in a parking lot.
Vehicle Positioning
At times, the position of the vehicle on the map may be
inaccurate due to one or more of the following reasons:
• Vehicle is entering and/or exiting a parking lot or a
garage.
• Road system has changed.
• GPS signal is not received.
• Vehicle is driving on slippery road surfaces such as
in sand, gravel, and/or snow.
• Roof carrier is installed on the vehicle.
• Vehicle is being driven with tire chains.
• Tires are replaced.
• Vehicle is traveling on winding roads.
• Vehicle is on a long straight road.
• Tire pressure for the tires is incorrect.
• Tires are worn.
• Vehicle is approaching a tall building or a large
vehicle.
• Surface streets run parallel to a freeway.
• First time the map DVD is inserted.
• Battery is disconnected for several days.
• Vehicle has just been transferred by a vehicle carrier
or a ferry.
• Vehicle is driving in heavy traffic where driving is at
low speeds, and the vehicle is stopped and started
repeatedly.
• Current position calibration is set incorrectly.
• Vehicle is traveling at high speed.
See your dealer/retailer if other problems occur.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Some routes may not be searched.
Problems with Route Guidance
• The route to the destination may not be shown
if there are new roads, if roads have recently
changed, or if certain roads are not listed on the
Inappropriate route guidance may occur under one or
more of the following conditions:
• You have not turned onto the road indicated.
• Route guidance may not be available when using
automatic rerouting for the next right or left turn.
To recalibrate the vehicle’s position on the map, see
your dealer/retailer.
• The route may not be changed when using
automatic rerouting.
If the System Needs Service
• There is no route guidance when turning at an
intersection.
If your system needs service and you have followed the
steps listed here and still are experiencing problems,
see your dealer/retailer for assistance.
• Plural names of places may be announced
occasionally.
Ordering Map DVDs
• It may take a long time to operate automatic
rerouting during high-speed driving.
The map DVD in your vehicle is the most up-to-date
information available when your vehicle was produced.
The map DVD is updated periodically, provided that
the map information has changed.
• Automatic rerouting may display a route returning to
the set stopover if you are heading for a destination
without passing through a set stopover.
• The route prohibits the entry of a vehicle due to a
regulation by time or season or any other regulation
which may be given.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have any questions about the operation of
the navigation system or the update process, contact
the GM Nav Disc Center toll-free phone number,
1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) or go to the center’s
website, gmnavdisc.com. If you need any updates or
a replacement disc, because the current disc is lost,
damaged, or needs to be updated, call the GM Nav
Disc Center or order a new disc online. To order a disc,
have your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) available.
This helps the center make sure you receive the correct
and most up-to-date DVD map disc for your vehicle.
See “Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)” in the Index
of your vehicle’s owner manual for more information.
Navigation Audio System
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
the vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment
can be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment can interfere with the
operation of the vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. The vehicle’s
systems can interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
After receiving the updated disc, replace the old disc
in the navigation system. See “Installing the DVD Map
Disc” and “Ejecting the DVD Map Disc” under Maps
on page 4-15. Dispose of the old disc to avoid confusion
about which disc is the most current.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of the vehicle
operate through the navigation system. If that
equipment is replaced or additional equipment is
added to the vehicle, the chimes may not work.
Make sure that replacement or additional equipment
is compatible with the vehicle before installing it.
See “Accessories and Modifications” in the Index
of the vehicle’s owner manual.
Database Coverage Explanations
Coverage area depends upon the map detail available.
Some areas have greater map detail than others. The
navigation system works only as well as the information
page 4-61 on how to obtain updated map information.
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
O / n (Power/Volume): Press to turn the audio
system on and off. Turn to increase or to decrease
the volume.
Press and hold for more than two seconds to turn off the
navigation system, the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
video screen, and Rear Seat Audio (RSA). If the vehicle
has not been turned off, press this knob to turn RSE and
RSA back on and to continue playback of the last active
source.
w (Tuning Knob): Turn to go to the next or
previous frequency or disc track or chapter. See CD
for more information.
AM source shown, other sources similar
AUDIO: Press to display the audio screen. Press to
switch between AM, FM, or XM, if equipped, DISC, or
AUX (Auxiliary), or touch the screen button. See CD
information.
If viewing a map screen, touch the source screen (AM,
FM, XM, CD, etc.) button. The display splits between the
audio screen and the map screen. All station-changing
functions can be performed from this screen.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM source shown, other sources similar
FM source shown, other sources similar
If you do not want to view a split screen or you are not
on a map screen, press the AUDIO hard key.
Category: Touch the screen button, located in the
middle of the screen, to receive a list of all of the selected
band stations in the area. Use the up and down arrows to
scroll the frequencies. Touch the desired frequency.
AM/FM/XM: Touch the source (AM, FM, or XM, if
equipped) screen button or press the AUDIO key
repeatedly until the desired source is highlighted.
XM lists also contain a category to select and the
stations or channels that have broadcasts that relate
to that category. For XM, touch the left and right
arrow screen buttons to change categories.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The station information appears on the display.
See “Radio Menu” later in this section to add and
remove XM categories from the category list. Removed
categories do not appear on the category list screen or
when the right and left arrow category screen buttons
are used.
Storing Radio Station Presets
This feature stores a mix of up to 30 AM, FM, and XM
(if equipped) preset stations. To store presets:
1. Press O to turn the system on.
2. If viewing a map screen, touch the source screen
button, press the AUDIO key, or press the FAV
(favorite) key.
FM lists may also contain a category to select if
stations in the broadcast area support Radio Data
Systems (RDS).
3. Select the band.
2 Refresh List: Touch to refresh the list of AM or
FM stations.
4. Seek, scan, or tune to the desired station, to select
the station.
When viewing a map screen, the name of the station or
channel displays.
5. Press and hold one of the preset screen buttons for
more than two seconds or until a beep is heard.
6. Repeat the steps for each preset.
y © ¨z (Seek): To seek stations, press the up or
down arrows to go to the next or previous station.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the next station.
To stop scanning, press either arrow again.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone
Sound Menu
TREBLE: Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) sign to
increase or decrease the treble. If a station is weak
or has static, decrease the treble.
MID (Midrange): Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) sign
to increase or decrease the midrange.
BASS: Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) sign to increase
or decrease the bass.
Adjusting the Speakers
L/R (Left/Right) (Balance): To adjust the balance
between the left and the right speakers, touch and
hold the L or R screen buttons.
Front/Rear (Fade): To adjust the fade between the
front and the rear speakers, touch and hold the Front
or Rear screen buttons.
e (Sound): Press this key or press the CONFIG key
to access the Sound menu to adjust the treble, midrange,
bass, fade, balance, and Digital Signal Processing (DSP).
The system automatically stores audio adjustment
settings as changes are made for each audio source
including AM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD, and AUX.
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
Radio Menu
The system has Digital Signal Processing (DSP).
DSP provides a choice of four different listening
experiences. DSP can be used while listening to
the audio system. Not all DSP modes are available
for all source types. The type of DSP selected is
displayed on the status line.
Select from the following DSP settings:
Normal: Adjusts the audio for normal mode. This
provides the best sound quality for all seating positions.
Surround (Centerpoint®): Enables Bose Centerpoint
signal processing that produces a surround sound
listening experience from a CD or XM stereo digital
audio source. Centerpoint delivers five independent
audio channels from conventional two channel stereo
recordings (not available for AM or FM).
Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu
screen, then press the CONFIG key repeatedly
until Radio is selected or touch the Radio screen button
to make changes for radio information displayed or to
limit features while driving, number of preset pages,
XM categories, and Bose® AudioPilot®.
Driver: Adjusts the audio to give the driver the best
possible sound quality.
Rear: Adjusts the audio to give the rear seat occupants
the best possible sound quality.
2 CH. (Channel): Enhances surround sound.
5.1 CH. (Channel): Gives a full affect of surround
sound listening. This button is only available when
playing DVD video and DVD audio discs that support
5.1 audio and the RSA is off.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn it off, touch the OFF screen button. When
on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the audio system
equalization, to compensate for background noise, so
that the music sound is consistent at the set volume level.
Limit Features While Driving
Touch the Limit Features While Driving screen button to
turn on and off the ability to limit functions while driving.
When this screen button is highlighted, the following
functions will be limited while driving:
This feature is most effective at lower volume settings
where background noise can affect how well the music
being played is heard through the vehicle’s audio system.
At higher volume settings, where the music is much
louder than the background noise, there may be little
or no adjustments by AudioPilot®. For more information
on AudioPilot®, visit bose.com/audiopilot.
• Music Navigator Scrolling
• Radio Category Scrolling
• Navigation Menu Scrolling and some functions
Number of Preset Pages
Remove/Add XM Categories
Touch the Number of Preset Pages screen button to
change the number of preset pages, 1 through 6.
Each preset page can contain five preset stations.
Touch the desired numbered screen button.
Bose® AudioPilot®
AudioPilot: The Bose® AudioPilot® noise
compensation technology.
To use AudioPilot®:
Touch the Remove/Add XM Categories screen button
to remove or add XM categories when selecting XM
categories from the category list screen. The list of
XM categories appear on the screen. Use the up and
down arrow screen buttons to scroll through the list.
The categories to remove are highlighted and the
categories to add are dark in color. Touch the category to
be added or removed. Touch the Restore All Categories
screen button to add all categories that have been
removed.
1. Press the CONFIG key to enter the menu screen,
then press the CONFIG key repeatedly until Radio
is selected or touch the Radio screen button
2. Press the Automatic Volume Control screen button
to access the AudioPilot menu.
3. Press the ON screen button.
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. With RDS, the radio
can do the following:
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
Online while not in the vehicle. A service fee is required
to receive the XM service. For more information, contact
XM at xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
and xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies on receiving specific information from
these stations and only works when the information is
available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast
incorrect information that causes the radio features
to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio
station.
When XM™ is active, the channel name and number,
song title, and artist displays on the screen.
The RDS system is always on. When information is
broadcast from the FM station that is playing, the station
name or call letters displays on the audio screen.
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Title Info: No song title information is available.
The system is working properly.
XM™ Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): XL on the radio
display, after the channel name, indicates content
with explicit language. These channels, or any others,
can be blocked at a customer’s request by calling
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No CAT Info: No category information is available.
The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated and no action is required.
No Information: No text or informational messages
are available. The system is working properly.
No XM signal: The vehicle is in a location that is
blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is moved
into an open area, the signal should return.
XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver may have
previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having your
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Loading XM: The audio system is processing audio
and text data received. No action is needed.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
will alternate with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID
label. This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned
to channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned.
Check XM Receiver: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver may have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available.
The system is working properly.
4-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
CD Player
The player can be used for CD, MP3, DVD audio, and
for more information about DVD audio and video.
If viewing a map screen, touch the CD screen button.
The display will split between the audio screen and the
map screen. If you do not want to view a split screen or
you are not on a map screen, press the AUDIO key then
press the AUDIO key repeatedly until CD is selected or
touch the CD screen button.
Six-Disc CD Player
While playing a CD, the navigation system is available.
When you insert a CD, the CD tab displays. If a
DSP setting is selected for the CD, it activates each
time you play a CD.
M (Load): To load one disc, do the following:
1. Press the load hard key and follow the screen
message displayed.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
2. When the system displays “Insert Disc (number)”,
insert the disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The system will pull it into the first available slot and
start playing. The system will display the type of
disc inserted.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To load multiple discs, do the following:
Playing an Audio CD
1. Press and hold the load hard key and follow the
screen message displayed.
2. When the system displays “Insert Disc (number)”,
insert the disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The system will pull it in.
3. Once a disc is loaded, the system will display
“Insert Disc (number)” again. Load the next disc.
Repeat this procedure for each disc. The player
takes up to six discs, do not try to load more than six.
The system does not display the disc types when
loading all, until the discs have been read by the
system.
Z (Eject): To eject a disc, do the following:
1. Press the eject hard key.
j / r (Pause/Play): Touch this button to pause the
CD. This button will then change to the play button.
Touch the play button to play the CD.
2. The system displays “Ejecting Disc”.
Press the DISC screen button to display the
Disc Changer screen. Select the disc to eject. If a
selection is not made, the system will eject the disc
from the current slot. If the disc is not removed from
the slot, the system pulls it back in after 10 seconds
and starts playing it.
Random: Touch this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order. Touch Random
again to turn off random play.
DISC: Touch this screen button to view the list of
loaded disc(s). Select the disc to play.
To eject all discs, press and hold the eject hard key.
The system displays the disc number being ejected.
4-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
r (Rewind): Touch and hold this button to rewind
quickly through a track selection. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release this button to stop rewinding.
The display will show the elapsed time of the track.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
There are guidelines that must be met, when creating an
MP3 disc. If the guidelines are not met when recording a
CD-R(W), the CD may not play. The guidelines are:
[ (Forward): Touch and hold this button to fast
forward quickly through a track selection. You will hear
sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to stop
fast forwarding. The display will show the elapsed time
of the track.
• Sampling rate: 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
and 44.1 kHz.
• Bit rates supported: 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,
128, 160, 192, 224, 256, and 320 kbps.
y © ¨z (Seek): To seek tracks, press the up arrow
to go to the next track. Press the down arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than eight seconds have
played. If either arrow is pressed more than once, the
player continues moving backward or forward through
the CD. The sound mutes while seeking.
• ID3 tag information is displayed by the radio
if it is available. The radio supports ID3 tag
information v1.0, v1.1, or v2.0. The radio will display
a filename, song name, artist name, album name,
and directory name.
• Maximum 32 characters, including spaces, in a file or
folder name.
w (Tuning Knob): Turn this knob counterclockwise
one notch to go to the start of the current track, turn it
again to go to the previous track. Turn this knob
clockwise to go to the next track.
• Maximum number of folders is 100 with a maximum
hierarchy of eight folders.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using
one folder for each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
When playing an audio CD the rear seat operator can
power on the RSE video screen and use the remote
control to navigate through the tracks on the CD.
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• It is recommended that there is a maximum of
192 files on a disc.
Order of Play
Play will begin from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root directory have
been played, play will continue from files according
to their numerical listing. After playing the last track
from the last folder, play will begin again at the first
track of the first folder or root directory.
• The files can be recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW with
a maximum capacity of 700MB.
• DVD with MP3 are not playable on this system.
Root Directory
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name. The new track
name will appear on the display.
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as No Folder or ALL.
File System and Naming
Empty Directory or Folder
The song name that will display will be the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will display
the file name without the extension (such as .mp3)
as the track name.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
will advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension
of the filename will not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the
files will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on a CD
that was recorded without folders or playlists. When
displaying the name of the folder the radio will display
No Folder.
4-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing an MP3
M (Load): To load one disc, do the following:
While playing a CD, the navigation system is available.
1. Press the load hard key and follow the screen
message displayed.
When you insert a CD, the CD tab will display.
If you select a DSP setting for the CD, it will be
activated each time you play a CD.
2. When the system displays “Insert Disc (number)”,
insert the disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The system will pull it into the first available slot and
start playing. The system will display the type of
disc inserted.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
To load multiple discs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load hard key and follow the
screen message displayed.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
2. When the system displays “Insert Disc (number)”,
insert the disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The system will pull it in.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
If viewing a map screen, touch the CD screen button.
The display will split between the audio screen and the
map screen. If you do not want to view a split screen or
you are not on a map screen, press the AUDIO key then
press the AUDIO key repeatedly until CD is selected or
touch the CD screen button.
3. Once a disc is loaded, the system will display
“Insert Disc (number)” again. Load the next disc.
Repeat this procedure for each disc. The player
takes up to six discs, do not try to load more than six.
The system will not display the disc types when
loading all, until the discs have been read by the
system.
Once all discs have been inserted, the system will
start playing the last loaded disc.
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z (Eject): To eject a disc, do the following:
1. Press the eject hard key.
j / r (Pause/Play): Touch this button to pause the
CD. This button will then change to the play button.
Touch the play button to play the CD.
2. The system will display “Ejecting Disc”.
Random: Touch this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order. Touch Random
again to turn off random play.
Press the DISC screen button to display the
Disc Changer screen. Select the disc to eject.
If a selection is not made, the system will eject the
disc from the current slot. If the disc is not removed
from the slot, the system will pull it back in after
10 seconds and start playing it.
DISC: Touch this screen button to view the list of
loaded disc(s). Select the disc to play.
r (Rewind): Touch and hold this button to rewind
quickly through a track selection. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release this button to stop rewinding.
The display will show the elapsed time of the track.
To eject all discs at once, press and hold the eject
hard key. The system will display the disc number being
ejected.
[ (Forward): Touch and hold this button to fast
forward quickly through a track selection. You will hear
sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to stop
fast forwarding. The display will show the elapsed time
of the track.
4-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
q r (Folder/Artist/Album): Select the left or right
arrow to go to the previous or next folder, artist,
or album on the disc.
CD Messages
If Disc Read Error appears on the display and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
Press the middle screen button, with the folder, artist,
or album name, to sort the MP3 by folder, artist, or album.
It may take a few minutes for the system to sort the MP3.
• If a disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown
format.
• If the map DVD disc was installed into the CD slot.
page 4-15 for more information.
y © ¨z (Seek): To seek tracks, press the up arrow
to go to the next track. Press the down arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than eight seconds have
played. If either arrow is pressed more than once, the
player will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD. The sound will mute while seeking.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
w (Tuning Knob): Turn this knob counterclockwise
one notch to go to the start of the current track, turn
it again to go to the previous track. Turn this knob
clockwise to go to the next track.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
When playing an MP3 the rear seat operator can power
on the RSE video screen and use the remote control
to navigate through the MP3.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an error appears on the display, see “DVD Messages”
later in this section.
DVD Player
The player can be used for DVD audio and DVD video.
M (Load): To load one disc, do the following:
DVD video will not display on the navigation screen
unless the vehicle is in PARK (P). It will operate on the
rear seat entertainment screens while the vehicle is
moving. The Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) video
screen will start play of the DVD when a DVD video
has been inserted into the navigation system. The DVD
player can be controlled by the buttons on the navigation
system, the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system, and the
remote control. The DVD player can also be used for
the rear seat passengers with the radio off. The rear
seat passengers can power on the video screen and
use the remote control to navigate the disc. See “Rear
Seat Entertainment System” in the Index of your vehicle’s
owner manual for more information.
1. Press the load hard key and follow the screen
message displayed.
2. When the system displays “Insert Disc (number)”,
insert the disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The system will pull it into the first available slot
and start playing. The system will display the type
of disc inserted.
To load multiple discs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load hard key and follow the
screen message displayed.
2. When the system displays “Insert Disc (number)”,
insert the disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The system will pull it in.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot is compatible with most audio CDs,
CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW,
DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats.
4-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Once a disc is loaded, the system will display
“Insert Disc (number)” again. Load the next disc.
Repeat this procedure for each disc. The player
takes up to six discs, do not try to load more than six.
The system will not display the disc types when
loading all, until the discs have been read by the
system.
Playing a DVD
There are three ways to play a DVD:
• Once a DVD is inserted, the system will
automatically start play of the DVD.
• If you are on a map screen, touch the DVD screen
button.
Once all discs have been inserted, the system will
start playing the last loaded disc.
• Press the AUDIO hard key, then touch the DVD
screen button.
Z (Eject): To eject a disc, do the following:
1. Press the eject hard key.
When a DVD is loaded, the rear seat passengers can
power on the RSE video screen and use the remote
control to navigate through the DVD.
2. The system will display “Ejecting Disc”.
Press the DISC screen button to display the
Disc Changer screen. Select the disc to eject.
If a selection is not made, the system will eject the
disc from the current slot. If the disc is not removed
from the slot, the system will pull it back in after
10 seconds and start playing it.
O / 3 (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn
the system on and off. Turn the knob to increase
or decrease the volume of the audio system.
Press and hold this knob for more than two seconds
to turn off the navigation system, RSE video screen, and
RSA. If the vehicle has not been tuned off, the RSE and
the RSA can be turned back on by pressing this knob and
will continue play of the last active source.
To eject all discs at once, press and hold the eject hard
key. The system will display the disc number being
ejected.
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move: Touch this button to move the cursor buttons
back and forth from the bottom-right corner to the top-left
corner of the screen.
DVD Menu Options
Once a DVD starts to play, the menu options and cursor
screen buttons will automatically appear. To display
the menu Options screen button while a DVD is playing,
touch anywhere on the screen.
j / r (Pause/Play): Touch this button to pause the
DVD. This button will then change to the play button.
Touch the play button to play the DVD. Touch this button
in a DVD disc main menu to start the movie.
Options: Select this screen button to view the menu
option screen buttons. Menu options are available when
they are highlighted. Some menu options are only
available when the DVD is not playing.
c (Stop): Touch this button to stop play of the DVD.
Press the play button to continue playing the DVD from
where the DVD was stopped. Press this button twice to
return to the beginning of the DVD.
Cursor: Touch this button to access the cursor
menu. The arrows and other cursor options allow
you to navigate the DVD menu options. The cursor
menu options are only available if a DVD has a menu.
Use the cursor menu to start a DVD video from the disc
main menu.
DISC: Touch this screen button to view the list of
loaded disc(s). Select the disc to play.
r (Rewind): Touch and release this button to rewind
through the scene, chapters, and titles. Touch this button
again to increase the rewinding speed. Touch the play
button to stop rewinding. This button may not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
q, Q, r, R (Arrow Buttons): Use these arrow
buttons to move around the DVD menu.
Enter: Touch this button to select the highlighted
option.
[ (Forward): Touch and release this button to
advance rapidly through the scene, chapters, and titles.
Touch this button again to increase the fast forwarding
speed. Touch the play button to stop fast forwarding.
This button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
Return: Touch this button to go back to the previous
DVD menu.
Back: Touch this button to go back to the main DVD
display screen.
4-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subtitle: Touch this button to playback the video with
subtitles. This is not available on all DVDs or when the
DVD is stopped. This button is not available for DVD
audio.
Angle: Touch this button to adjust the viewing angle of
the DVD. Repeatedly press this button to toggle through
the angles. This is not available on all DVDs or when the
DVD is stopped. This button is not available for DVD
audio.
q (Previous Scene): Press this button to go to the
previous scene. This button does not work when the DVD
is stopped. This button is not available for DVD video.
r (Next Scene): Press this button to go to the next
scene. This button does not work when the DVD is
stopped. This button is not available for DVD video.
Hide Options: Press this screen button to remove all
menu options from the display, except Options and
Cursor.
Search: Touch this button to display the search screen.
Select Title or Chapter Search for DVD video and
Group or Track for DVD audio. The keyboard allows
you to type in the title/chapter/group/track number that
you would like to watch or listen to. This button does
not work when the DVD is stopped.
Top Menu: Touch this button to display the first menu
of the DVD. This is not available on all DVDs.
Menu: Touch this button to display the DVD menu
of the current area of the DVD that is playing.
This button is not available for DVD audio.
Setup: Touch this button to display the DVD Setup
screen. This button is only available when the DVD is not
playing. The DVD Setup screen allows you to change the
brightness, contrast, and mode, change the viewing on
the monitor and to change the initial settings; language,
parental level, and aspect.
Audio: Press this button to display the audio options.
Select the audio options that best improve sound quality.
This is not available on all DVDs or when the DVD is
stopped. This button is not available for DVD audio.
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings: From the DVD Setup screen, touch this
button to change the default audio, subtitle, and menu
languages, parental level, audio, and to view the aspect
of the DVD. These settings are not available on all
DVDs. This button is not available for DVD audio.
! (Brightness): Touch the up or down screen
arrows to increase or decrease the brightness of the
navigation screen.
_ (Contrast): Touch the up or down screen arrows to
increase or decrease the contrast of the navigation
screen.
Auto (Automatic): Touch this screen button for the
system to automatically adjust the navigation screen
background depending on exterior lighting conditions.
Night: Touch this screen button and the system
will make the navigation screen background brighten.
Day: Touch this screen button and the system will make
the navigation screen background darken.
Monitor: From the DVD Setup screen, touch this
button to adjust the viewing angle of the DVD on the
navigation screen. This is not available on all DVDs.
This button is not available for DVD audio
Audio Language: Touch English, Francais, Espanol,
Italiano, or Deutsch to change the default language that
the DVD player uses for each disc. The audio language
must be available on the disc. The audio language
may vary for each DVD.
Touch the e button to close the screen in from the left
and right sides.
Touch the J button to fill the screen on the left and
right sides.
Touch the d button to fill the screen on the top and
bottom.
4-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subtitle Language: Touch English, Francais, Espanol,
Italiano, or Deutsch to change the default language
of the subtitles that the DVD player uses for each disc.
The subtitle language must be available on the disc.
The subtitle language may vary for each DVD.
If the password has been forgotten, contact your
dealer/retailer.
This may not be available on all DVDs.
Aspect: Touch this button to change the aspect ratio of
the DVD. This may not be available on all DVDs.
Menu Language: Touch English, Francais, Espanol,
Italiano, or Deutsch to change the default language
of the DVD video menus. The menu language must
be available on the disc. The menu language may
vary for each DVD.
y (Next Track/Chapter): Press this hard key to go
to the next track or chapter. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
Parental Level: Touch this button to change the rating
level to only allow the play of DVDs with a certain rating.
The rating selection is 1 through 8, with 1 Kids Safe being
a G rating. If the 1 is selected, any DVD with a rating
above G will not be able to be viewed without entering
a password.
z (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this hard key
to return to the start of the current track or chapter.
Press this button again to go to the previous track
or chapter. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
When the parental level is first entered a keyboard will
appear on the display and a four-digit password will need
to be created. Type in a password that you will be able to
remember. Once the password is created, you can then
select a rating level.
w (Tuning Knob): Turn this knob counterclockwise
one notch to go to the start of the current chapter/track,
turn it again to go to the previous chapter/track. Turn
this knob clockwise to go to the next chapter/track.
If you would like to change the rating level, press the
Parental Level button, then press the Password button.
Type in the password and then change the rating level.
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Messages
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
If Disc Read Error appears on the display and/or the
DVD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
If playing recorded media such as a CD or DVD, the
sound quality may be reduced due to CD or DVD quality,
the method of recording, the quality of the music that has
been recorded, recording speed, max media recording
speed, and the way the CD or DVD has been handled.
There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding
tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these
problems occur, check the bottom surface of the CD or
DVD. If the surface is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, it will not play properly. If the surface is
soiled, see “Care of Your CDs and DVDs” in the Index of
the vehicle’s owner manual.
• If a disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown
format.
• If the disc is not from a correct region.
• If the map DVD disc was installed into the DVD
audio/video slot. See “Installing the Map DVD”
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the DVD should play.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD
or DVD.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the DVD should play.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD or DVD, or more
than one CD or DVD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged
CDs or DVDs, the player could be damaged. While
using the CD or DVD player, use only CDs or DVDs
in good condition without any label, load one CD or
DVD at a time, and keep the player and the loading
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
• The DVD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the DVD.
• The label may be caught in the DVD player.
If the DVD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good DVD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
4-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD or DVD, it could get
caught in the player. If a CD or DVD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is needed,
try labeling the top of the recorded CD or DVD with
a soft marker.
Auxiliary Devices
The vehicle may have a rear entertainment system
(RSE) with a second and third row screen. The RSE has
audio adapters to allow you to connect auxiliary devices.
The audio can be heard through the speakers or through
the wireless or wired headphones. See “Audio/Video
Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
information.
To switch the RSE system to use an auxiliary device:
1. Connect the auxiliary device to the RSE system, for
the second or third row.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
distraction.
2. Press the AUDIO key then press the AUDIO key
repeatedly until AUX (auxiliary) is selected or
touch the AUX screen button. An auxiliary device
must be connected for the AUX screen button
to appear as an option to select.
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. For the second row display select the Rear AUX
screen button next to Rear Display 1 and for the
third row display select the Rear AUX screen
button next to Rear Display 2. Each screen
works independently of the other. The second
row screen can watch a DVD while the third row
screen can use the auxiliary device.
Voice recognition can be used when the ignition is on
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” in the Index
of your vehicle’s owner manual for more information.
To use voice recognition, do the following:
1. Push and hold the
SRCE button on the
steering wheel until you
hear a beep. The audio
system mutes.
The rear seat passengers can also use the remote
control to change the functions of the RSE. See Rear
Voice Recognition
The navigation system’s voice recognition allows for
hands-free operation of the navigation system, audio
system, and OnStar® features. The DVD map disc must
be installed in the navigation system for voice recognition
to work. See “Installing the DVD Map Disc” under Maps
on page 4-15 for more information.
2. Clearly state one of the commands listed on the
following pages.
4-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Helpful Hints for Stating Commands
Voice Recognition Commands
• When a multiple command is available, choose the
The following list shows all of the voice commands
available for the navigation system with a brief
description of each. The commands are listed with the
optional words in brackets. To use the voice commands,
refer to the instructions listed previously.
command that works best.
• Words that are in brackets are optional.
For example, for the command Radio [band]
[select] FM, stating Radio FM or Radio select
FM are both valid commands.
• When the system recognizes the command the
system does one of the following:
− Perform the function.
Voice Tag Commands
The following are voice tag commands that can be
accessed by clearly stating the commands exactly as
they are written. There are up to 40 voice tag entries
for destinations.
− Ask you to confirm your choice.
− Issue an error message “Did not recognize.
Voice Recognition Canceled.”
Navigation go to [destination], navigation select:
These commands instruct the system to select a
destination saved under the voice tag you have stored.
The system prompts for a destination name then waits
for you to state the name.
• If you experience difficulty with the system
recognizing a command, try saying it more softly,
and wait for a few seconds after the beep, or repeat
the command.
• Background noise may cause voice commands to be
misunderstood, including airflow noise from wind.
• To use the voice recognition system, the map
DVD must be loaded and the navigation system
must be on.
If not currently driving on a route, the system
automatically creates the voice tag destination as
the final destination. If driving on a route, the system
automatically creates the voice tag destination as a
stopover. Up to three stopovers can be created.
This system is able to recognize commands in three
different languages. The system only recognizes
commands based on the language selected from the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing Voice Tags
Radio Commands
From the address book entry information page, press
the Add Voice tag screen button. The system responds
“Name Please?” and you will have four seconds to
record a name. The system asks for confirmation of
the name before saving it as a voice tag.
The following are radio commands that can be accessed
by clearly stating the commands exactly as they are
written.
Radio [band] [select] AM, radio [band] [select]
FM, radio [band] [select] XM, radio [band] [select]
satellite: Instructs the system to go to either the AM, FM,
or XM (if equipped).
Navigation Help
Navigation Help: This command instructs the system
Radio [select] (frequency) AM, radio [select]
(frequency) FM: Instructs the system to go to a
specific frequency on either AM or FM.
to assist with navigation commands.
Display Commands
Use the following display commands to set the
display mode.
Radio [select] (channel) XM, radio [select] (channel)
satellite: Instructs the system to go to a specific channel
on the XM™ band (if equipped).
Display [set] day [mode]: Sets the display to
daytime mode.
Radio help: Instructs the system to assist with radio
commands.
Display [set] night [mode]: Sets the display to
night mode.
Display [set] auto [mode]: Sets the display to
automatic mode. The system changes between day
and night mode automatically.
System help: Instructs the system to assist with
display commands.
4-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Commands
Auxiliary Commands
The following are CD, MP3, and DVD commands that
can be accessed by clearly stating the commands
exactly as they are written.
The following auxiliary commands can be accessed
by clearly stating the commands exactly as they
are written. The commands are available when the
auxiliary source is available.
CD, DVD, Disc: Use this command to select a CD,
DVD, or disc that is currently loaded.
Aux, Auxiliary: Use this command to select the
auxiliary device, when a device is connected.
CD, DVD, Disc, [select] track (one, two, three, etc.):
Instructs the system to select a specific track number.
Voice Help
CD, DVD, Disc select next folder: Use this command
to select the next folder on the MP3 or audio DVD.
Voice help: Provides a description of help commands
that can be used.
CD, DVD, Disc select previous folder: Use this
command to select the previous folder on the MP3
or audio DVD.
CD help, DVD help, Disc help: Instructs the system to
assist with CD and DVD commands.
4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defensive Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
{ CAUTION:
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system
can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone
who has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a
crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires and road
can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.
But that is only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination,
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a
vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others
is important.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a
braking skid.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on.
This is normal.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
page 3-40.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Along with ABS, the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The brakes might
vibrate or some noise might be heard, but this is normal.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
StabiliTrak® System
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
The vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system
called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer controlled
system that assists the driver with directional control of
the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
Brake Assist
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the
intended path.
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist
the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in
emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control
module increases brake pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to insure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
In some cases, it may take approximately two miles of
driving before the system initializes.
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates,
the cruise control automatically disengages. The cruise
control can be re-engaged when road conditions allow.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak
light along with one of the following messages will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC):
TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
The traction control disable
button is located on the
instrument panel below the
climate controls.
STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make
sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off
using the StabiliTrak on/off button. Then turn the steering
wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock position to the
three o’clock position. If this clears the message(s), the
vehicle does not need servicing. If this does not clear the
message(s), then turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds,
and then turn it back on again to reset the system. If any
of these messages still appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), the vehicle should be taken in for service.
For more information on the DIC messages, see Driver
The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off
by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if both
systems (traction control and StabiliTrak) were previously
on. To disable both traction control and StabiliTrak, press
and hold the button for five seconds.
Traction control and StabiliTrak can be turned on by
pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if not
automatically shut off for any other reason.
When the TCS or StabiliTrak system is turned off,
the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate TCS off or
StabiliTrak off message will be displayed on the DIC to
warn the driver. The vehicle will still have brake-traction
control when traction control is off, but will not be able
to use the engine speed management system. See
“Traction Control Operation” next for more information.
The StabiliTrak light will
flash on the instrument
panel cluster when the
system is both on and
activated.
When the traction control system has been turned off,
system noises may still be heard as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this
is normal.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle is allowed
to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak, ABS and
brake warning lights and any relevant DIC messages
are displayed, the transfer case could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin
the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
messages are displayed.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction in
acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
If cruise control is being used when the system activates,
the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise control will
automatically disengage. Cruise control may be
reengaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started. It will activate and the
StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction
while driving. If traction control is turned off, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will work.
The engine speed management will be disabled. In this
mode, engine power is not reduced automatically and the
driven wheels can spin more freely. This can cause the
brake-traction control to activate constantly.
StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it determines
that a problem exists with the system. If the problem does
not clear itself after restarting the vehicle, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RSS also interacts with the tow/haul mode that, when
engaged, will provide additional control of the shock
absorbers. This additional control results in better
ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
loaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Magnetic Ride Control™
The vehicle may have the MagneRide control system.
MagneRide constantly checks speed, wheel position,
lift/dive and steering of the vehicle. The damping force for
each shock absorber and adjustment level is chosen for
the best ride and handling.
Locking Rear Axle
MagneRide also works with the tow/haul switch that,
when engaged, will provide more firmness from the shock
absorbers. This added control gives better ride and
handling when carrying heavy loads or towing a trailer.
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction
on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when traction is
low, this feature will allow the rear wheel with the
most traction to move the vehicle.
Road Sensing Suspension
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
The Road Sensing Suspension (RSS) feature provides
superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions.
If the vehicle has this feature, engine power is sent to all
four wheels when extra traction is needed. This is like
four-wheel drive, but there is no separate lever or switch
to engage or disengage the front axle. It is fully automatic,
and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see “Four-Wheel
Drive” in the Two-mode Hybrid Supplement.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
Steering
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Power Steering
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as possible
from a collision. Then steer around the problem,
to the left or right depending on the space available.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about
one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Skidding
Passing
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s three
control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not
rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed
or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more
limited.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to
a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving
speeds, especially on rough terrain.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road
and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very
time you need special alertness and driving skills, your
reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be affected
by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a
serious — or even fatal — accident if you drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite
hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. When
off-road driving, traffic lanes are not marked, curves are
not banked, and there are no road signs. Surfaces can be
slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill.
Off-Road Driving
Vehicles with all-wheel drive can be used for off-road
driving. Vehicles without all-wheel drive and vehicles
with 22-inch tire/wheel assemblies should not be driven
off-road except on a level, solid surface.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure to
operate the vehicle correctly off-road could result in loss
of vehicle control or vehicle rollover.
Many of the vehicle design features that help make the
vehicle more responsive on paved roads during poor
weather conditions also help make it better suited for
off-road use than conventional passenger vehicles.
The vehicle does not have features usually thought to
be necessary for extended or severe off-road use such
as special underbody shielding and transfer case low
gear range.
Off-roading involves some new skills. That is why it is
very important that you read these driving tips and
suggestions to help make off-road driving safer
and more enjoyable.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance at
the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front fascia
lower air dam. The air dam is held in place by two bolts
and 10 snaps accessible from underneath the front
fascia.
Before You Go Off-Roading
• Have all necessary maintenance and service
work done.
• Make sure there is enough fuel, that fluid levels are
where they should be, and that the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, is fully inflated.
To remove the air dam:
1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.
2. With a flat-blade tool, disengage the snaps.
• Be sure to read all the information about
all-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual.
3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
disengaged, push forward on the air dam until it
is free.
• Make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has
them, are properly attached.
• Know the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you will be driving or check with law enforcement
people in the area.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
periods without the front fascia lower air dam
installed can cause improper air flow to the engine.
Always be sure to replace the front fascia air
dam when you are finished off-road driving.
• Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will
be on private land.
After off-roading, be sure to reinstall the air dam:
1. Line up the snaps and push the air dam rearward
to engage the snaps.
2. Install the two outboard bolts.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
• The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward
of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward
as you can.
{ CAUTION:
• Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are
not tossed around.
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the
seatbacks can be thrown forward during a
sudden stop. You or your passengers could
be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the
seatbacks.
You will find other important information under Loading
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough terrain.
You or your passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in
the cargo area as far forward and low as
possible.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to
a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route. Get
accurate maps of trails and terrain. Check to see if there
are any blocked or closed roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle in case something happens to one of them.
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving and obey all posted regulations.
For vehicles with a winch, be sure to read the winch
instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if
you get stuck but you will want to know how to use
it properly.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife.
This includes wheel-spinning, breaking down
trees, or unnecessary driving through streams
or over soft ground.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-roading requires some new and different skills.
• Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes
need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected
obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire
or engine sounds. Use your arms, hands, feet, and
body to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves, and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle
is to control the speed. At higher speeds:
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. Be familiar with the terrain and its many
different features.
• You approach things faster and have less time to
react.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading surfaces can be
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle’s
steering, acceleration, and braking in different ways.
Depending on the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel
spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer
braking distances can occur.
• There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• The vehicle has more bounce when driving over
obstacles.
• More braking distance is needed, especially on an
unpaved surface.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself.
{ CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and quick
changes in direction can easily throw you out of
position. This could cause you to lose control and
crash. So, whether you are driving on or off the
road, you and your passengers should wear safety
belts.
Some things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm
grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface
features can jerk the wheel out of your hands.
Driving on Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what the vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, the
wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, you cannot control the vehicle
as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
{ CAUTION:
Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from
driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road
signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. Use good
judgment about what is safe and what is not.
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. If
you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive down
them, you cannot control your speed. If you drive
across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, do not drive the hill.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to
climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to
judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top.
On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near
the top, but you might not see this because the crest of
the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill:
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
speed. Not using more power than needed can
avoid spinning the wheels or sliding.
Consider this as you approach a hill:
{ CAUTION:
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way
to find out.
• Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to
approaching traffic on trails or hills.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P (Park) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill as straight as possible in
R (Reverse).
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use headlamps even during the day to make the
vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
• While backing down the hill, put your left hand on the
steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position so you can
tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as
you back down. It is best to back down the hill with
the wheels straight rather than in the left or right
direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
{ CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured or killed. As you near
the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall,
when going up a hill:
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
N (Neutral) to rev-up the engine and regain forward
momentum. This will not work. The vehicle can roll
backward very quickly and could go out of control.
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot
make it up the hill:
• Never try to turn around if about to stall when going
up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle,
it is steep enough to cause it to roll over. If you
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards and apply the parking
brake.
cannot make it up the hill, back straight down the hill.
• If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill in R (Reverse).
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your
transmission in P (Park), and turn off the engine. Leave
the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side
and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled
downhill.
• If the engine has stopped running, you need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Things not to do when driving down a hill:
Driving Downhill
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down might be too steep to drive
across. The vehicle could roll over.
When off-roading takes you downhill, consider:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes will
have to do all the work and could overheat
and fade.
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill,
but if it happens when going downhill:
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
1. Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and
apply the parking brake.
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, try to keep the
vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear so engine
drag can help the brakes so they do not have to do all the
work. Descend slowly, keeping the vehicle under control
at all times.
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
{ CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause
loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the
brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low
gear to keep vehicle speed under control.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels which could cause a downhill slide
or a rollover.
Driving Across an Incline
An off-road trail will probably go across the incline
of a hill. To decide whether to try to drive across the
incline, consider the following:
• Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose gravel,
muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause the tires
to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips
sideways, it can hit something that will trip it — a
rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
{ CAUTION:
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into
a rut or depression, the vehicle can tilt even more.
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, do not drive
across it. Find another route instead.
For these reasons, carefully consider whether to try to
drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes
across the incline does not mean you have to drive it.
The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down
might be too steep to drive across. When going
straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base — the distance from the front wheels to the
rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when driving across an
incline, the narrower track width — the distance
between the left and right wheels — might not
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn
downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and
prevent the side slipping. The best way to prevent
this is to “walk the course” first, so you know what the
surface is like before driving it.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stalling on an Incline
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels do
not get good traction. Acceleration is not as quick,
turning is more difficult, and braking distances are
longer.
{ CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
It is best to use a low gear when in mud — the deeper
the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck.
When driving on sand, wheel traction changes.
On loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or
sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into the sand.
This affects steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive
at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure you,
and any passengers, get out on the uphill side, even if the
door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill
side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will be right in
its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that
you will have difficulty accelerating. And, if the vehicle
does get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can
cause it to slide out of control.
Driving in Water
{ CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it is
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive
through rushing water.
{ CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your
passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on
safe surfaces only.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before driving through it.
Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel
hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get
through. Deep water can damage the axle and other
vehicle parts.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system and
the vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get the
tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is under water, you will
never be able to start the engine. When going through
water, remember that when the brakes get wet, it might
take longer to stop. See Driving in Rain and on Wet
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected
on the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.
These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system
for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system
for any leakage.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
The vehicle requires more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 6-56.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
• Turn off cruise control.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
about driving off-road.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to accelerate on slippery roads, but slow down and adjust
your driving to the road conditions. When driving through
deep snow, turn off the traction control part of the
StabiliTrak® System to help maintain vehicle motion at
lower speeds.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain begins
to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet
ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt
or sand.
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,
but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blizzard Conditions
CAUTION: (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
{ CAUTION:
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
CAUTION: (Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps.
{ CAUTION:
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Recovery Hooks
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. Recovery hooks can be used, if the vehicle
has them. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see
{ CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on
the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could
break off and you or others could be injured from
the chain or cable snapping back.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the
vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
page 6-62.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing a
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg )
B
C
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your
vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions.
The combined weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s
capacity weight.
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
0 lbs (0 kg)
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification/Tire Label
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh
your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
Be sure to spread out your load equally on both
sides of the center line.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached
to the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label
shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires and
the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components
that fail because of overloading.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
The label will help you decide how much cargo
and installed equipment your truck can carry.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle
goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may
need to put a limit on how many people you
can carry inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh
your vehicle before you buy and install the
new equipment.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Automatic Level Control
The automatic level control rear suspension
comes as a part of the Road Sensing Suspension.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as
better handling under a variety of passenger and
loading conditions. An air compressor connected
to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of
the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system is activated when the ignition key is
turned to RUN and will automatically adjust vehicle
height thereafter. The system may exhaust (lower
vehicle height) for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
key has been turned to LOCK. You may hear the air
compressor operating when the height is being
adjusted.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing the vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground
and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate,
thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the
height. See “Weight distributing Hitches and Weight
page 5-44.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
Towing Your Vehicle
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/
retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled
page 8-7.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Dinghy and Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with any of its wheels on the ground.
All-wheel-drive vehicles are not designed to be towed
with any wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must
be towed, see Towing Your Vehicle previously.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle, the vehicle must
be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly. See “Dolly
Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)” following.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Dinghy Towing
Dolly Towing
(Front Wheels Off the Ground)
Notice: If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with all
four wheels on the ground, the transmission could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not tow a two-wheel-drive
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground.
Notice: If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
Dolly Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Level Control
Automatic Level Control
The automatic level control rear suspension is available
on light-duty vehicles and comes as a part of the
Autoride® suspension, if equipped.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will provide
a better leveled riding position as well as better handling
under a variety of passenger and loading conditions. An
air compressor connected to the rear shocks will raise or
lower the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle
height. The system is activated when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN and will automatically adjust vehicle
height thereafter. The system may exhaust (lower vehicle
height) for up to ten minutes after the ignition key has
been turned off. You may hear the air compressor
operating when the height is being adjusted.
Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a
two-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.
page 2-34.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Autoride®
Towing a Trailer
With this feature, improved vehicle ride and handling is
provided under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
{ CAUTION:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Autoride also interacts with the tow/haul mode that, when
activated, will provide additional control of the shock
absorbers. This additional control results in better ride
and handling characteristics when the vehicle is loaded or
towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing a
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the
advice in this section and see your dealer/retailer for
important information about towing a trailer with the
vehicle.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,
braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used
properly.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for your safety and that of your passengers.
So please read this section carefully before pulling a
trailer.
• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
• If the vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and it doesn’t seem to be working properly
while pulling a trailer, turn the system off. See
information.
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• And the weight on the vehicle’s tires
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important.
It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for
more information.
Use the following chart to determine how much the
vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and
options.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
3.42
Maximum Trailer Weight
8,300 lbs (3 765 kg)
8,100 lbs (3 674 kg)
7,600 lbs (3 447 kg)
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg)
GCWR*
Escalade 2WD 6.2L V8
Escalade AWD 6.2L V8
Escalade ESV 2WD 6.2L V8
Escalade ESV AWD 6.2L V8
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
3.42
3.42
3.42
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information
or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
for more information.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the
vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot
of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the
vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can
carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle
can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be
added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See for more information about the
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carrying hitch.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to the
maximum of 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with a weight distributing
hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg),
adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit for
RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg)
could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs
(181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now weighs:
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
might think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be
subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect on
the rear axle must still be considered. Because the rear
axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg)
can be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer
weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the
rear axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much
as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle
could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight that can be handled.
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total
loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer the
vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of
its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer
Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it
is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
the vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver door
information. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit
for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of
the trailer tongue. If using a weight distributing
(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle.
hitch, make sure not to go over the rear axle limit
before applying the weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
If a step-bumper hitch is used, the bumper could be
damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample room
when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and
the bumper.
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh
more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a properly
mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway control of
the proper size. This equipment is very important
for proper vehicle loading and good handling when
driving. Always use sway control if the trailer will weigh
more than these limits. Ask a hitch dealer about
sway controls.
To reinstall the hitch cover:
Hitch Cover
The vehicle may have a hitch cover. To remove the
hitch cover:
1. Turn the fasteners on the lower tabs 90 degrees
counterclockwise.
2. Lift the lower edge of the cover about 45 degrees.
3. Pull the cover downward to disengage the upper
attachments.
1. Hold the cover at a 45 degree angle to the vehicle
and push the upper tabs in the hitch cover into the
chrome slots in the fascia.
2. Move the bottom of the cover forward until the
lower tabs line up with the lower fascia slots.
3. Snap the hitch cover into place by pushing the
upper corners forward.
4. Turn the fasteners on the lower tabs 90 degrees
clockwise to lock the cover in place.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This indicator light on the
instrument panel cluster
comes on when the
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to
help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. If the trailer being towed
weighs up to the vehicle’s trailer rating limit, safety chains
may be attached to the attaching point on the hitch
platform. Always leave just enough slack so the rig can
turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
tow/haul mode is on.
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode
on page 2-33 for more information.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
See “Weight of the Trailer” later in the section. Tow/Haul
is most useful under the following driving conditions:
Tow/Haul Mode
Pressing this button at
the end of the shift lever
turns on and off the
tow/haul mode.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in busy parking lots where improved low speed
control of the vehicle is desired.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded
or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when
the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
The vehicle is equipped with Autoride® which further
on page 5-44 for more information.
Driving with a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Trailer Brakes
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 2,000 lbs
(900 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, the trailer
brakes cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic system.
• Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks
and make necessary repairs before starting
a trip.
• Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or
rear-most window open.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road.
Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind
that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as
responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection
at the same time.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky
or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This can
help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
Passing
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned
out. For this reason you may think other drivers are
seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
{ CAUTION:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
The tow/haul mode may be used if the transmission
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while
parked, preferably on level ground, with the transmission
in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning the engine
off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
{ CAUTION:
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• Start the engine
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
• Shift into a gear
• Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
If the engine has been left running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when
on fairly level ground, always put the shift lever
fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule or Index
for more information. Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid,
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and
during the trip.
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red w/ Black Stripe: Battery Feed*
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the
underhood electrical center, but the circuits are
not connected. They should be installed by your dealer
or a qualified service center.
If charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press the
Tow/Haul mode button, if equipped, located at the end of
the shift lever. This will boost the vehicle system voltage
and properly charge the battery. If the trailer is too light
for Tow/Haul mode, or the vehicle is not equipped with
Tow/Haul, turn on the headlamps as a second way to
boost the vehicle system and charge the battery.
The vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector is attached to the rear
bumper beam. It is located next to the integrated trailer
hitch.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electric Brake Control Wiring
Provisions
Trailer Recommendations
Subtract the hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating
(CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of the load
the vehicle can carry. It does not include the weight of
the people inside, but you can figure about 150 lbs.
(68 kg) for each passenger. The total cargo load must
not be more than the vehicles CWR.
These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle
as part of the heavy-duty trailer wiring package.
These provisions are for an electric brake controller.
The red/black stripe power feed will not be connected
to the battery until the ring terminal is unstowed and
connected to the underhood electrical center. The
instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the data
link connector for the trailer brake controller. The harness
contains the following wires:
Weigh the vehicle with the trailer attached, so the
GVWR or GAWR are not exceeded. If using a
weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without
the spring bars in place.
• Dark Blue: Auxiliary
• Red/Black: Battery
The best performance is obtained by correctly spreading
out the weight of the load and choosing the correct
hitch and trailer brakes.
• Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
• White: Ground
The trailer brake controller should be installed by your
dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
If this vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2),
you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel E85
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
Gasoline Octane
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
If the vehicle has the 6.0L V8 engine (VIN Code 5),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you might
notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2),
you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
page 6-5. In all other engines, use only the unleaded
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing
MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission control system could be
affected. The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on.
If this occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Only vehicles that have the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2)
can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the use
of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol
in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from
renewable sources such as corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that
do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol
content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content
is greater than 85%.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle’s fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by
additives would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle
warranty.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according to
ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble starting
on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly
formulated for your climate. If this happens, switching to
gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve
starting. For good starting and heater efficiency below
32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain
no more than 70% ethanol. It is best not to alternate
repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do switch
fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible — do not add less than three gallons (11 L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately
after refueling for at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the
vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will
need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85
than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the Tank
on page 6-9.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle. If the vehicle has
E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be yellow and
state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See Fuel E85
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in
and release and it will open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
When replacing the fuel cap, insert the tether in its hole
before tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap clockwise
until it clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap
on the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap is
fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine
if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), the
TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays if the fuel
cap is not properly installed.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-42.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle to the lower left
of the steering wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the
secondary hood release, near the center of the
grille.
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then bring the hood from full open to
within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed position,
pause, then push the front center of the hood with a
swift, firm motion to fully close the hood.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 6-34.
page 6-40.
Engine Oil
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
Checking Engine Oil
F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
G. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND) (Out of View).
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview on page 6-14
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
I
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this
vehicle.
• GM4718M
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people
who will perform this work using genuine parts and
reset the system. It is also important to check the oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are
all that is needed for good performance and engine
protection.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message being turned on, reset the system.
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system
must be reset every time the oil is changed.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine
Oil Life System:
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on.
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life system might not
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC
for more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when the vehicle is started, the Engine Oil Life
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1
through 6. When the engine air cleaner/filter is removed,
lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the
engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1. Locate the air cleaner/
filter assembly. See
Overview on
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
page 6-14.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
on dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.
2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing
and lift up the cover.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid
level. The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak
or overheating the transmission. If you suspect a small
leak, then use the following checking procedures to check
the fluid level. However, if there is a large leak, then it
may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer/
retailer service department and have it repaired before
driving the vehicle further.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Before checking the fluid level, prepare the vehicle as
follows:
1. Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level
surface. Keep the engine running.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in
P (Park).
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the
page 7-4. Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, move the
shift lever back to P (Park).
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for at least
one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
5. Keep the engine running and press the Trip/Fuel
button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS
TEMP (Transmission Temperature) displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine and
perform the appropriate check procedure. If the
TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required
temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool,
or operate the vehicle until the appropriate
transmission fluid temperature is reached.
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Check Procedure
Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if the
transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until
a hot check procedure can be made. The hot check
procedure is the most accurate method to check the
fluid level. Perform the hot check procedure at the first
opportunity. Use this cold check procedure to check fluid
level when the transmission temperature is between
80°F and 90°F (27°C and 32°C).
1. Locate the transmission
dipstick at the
rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger side of
the vehicle.
5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band,
add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level
into the COLD band. It does not take much fluid,
generally less than one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill.
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after
the transmission reaches a normal operating
temperature between 160°F to 200°F (71°C to 93°C).
for more information.
7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
2. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level
when the transmission fluid temperature is between
160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C).
The hot check is the most accurate method to check the
fluid level. The hot check should be performed at the first
opportunity in order to verify the cold check. The fluid
level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is
important to ensure the transmission temperature is
within range.
1. Locate the transmission
dipstick at the
5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch
band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within the
HOT band, and the transmission temperature is
between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add or
drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the
HOT band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough
fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It does not
take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L).
Do not overfill.
rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger side of the
vehicle.
for more information.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
2. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consistency of Readings
Cooling System
Always check the fluid level at least twice using
the procedures described. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level.
If fluid is added, it may take 15 minutes or longer
to obtain an accurate reading because of residual
fluid draining down the dipstick tube. If inconsistent
readings persist, check the transmission breather to be
sure it is clean and not clogged. If readings are still
inconsistent, contact your dealer/retailer.
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
What to Use
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
{ CAUTION:
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at
or above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before this is done.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle.
more information on location.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak in the
cooling system.
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the FULL COLD mark.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it.
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the
coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill
procedure Steps 1 through 6.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
There is a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan.
In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and a ENGINE
POWER IS REDUCED message comes on in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
{ CAUTION:
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
on page 6-33 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
on page 6-33 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along
with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious
problem.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays,
the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle
slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance
from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
five minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” later in this section.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or
the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Engine Fan Noise
The vehicle has electric cooling fans. You might hear
the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday
driving. The fans can turn off if no cooling is required.
Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or
high outside temperatures, or if you are operating the
air conditioning system, the fans can change to
high speed and you might hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and indicates that the cooling system
is functioning properly. The fans change to low speed
when additional cooling is no longer required.
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil
Power Steering Fluid
reservoir location.
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-13.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing in an area where the temperature may fall
below freezing.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Adding Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
The vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC
that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message
is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition
cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
message displays, you will need to add washer fluid to
the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 6-14 for reservoir
location.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
Brakes
Brake Fluid
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid. See
Overview on page 6-14
for the location of the
reservoir.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn,
there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Brake Fluid
{ CAUTION:
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-4.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Add
Brake Wear
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in
the brake hydraulic system can damage brake
hydraulic system parts so badly that they will
have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Battery
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Brake Adjustment
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Every brake stop, the disc brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, you
may want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following
steps to do it safely.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all the lamps that are not needed.
This avoids sparks and helps save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in Neutral before setting the parking brake. If
you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear, not in Neutral.
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery.
If the vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal, it is
located under a red plastic cover at the positive
battery post. To uncover the remote positive (+)
terminal, open the red plastic cover.
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
The remote negative (-) terminal is a stud located
on the right front of the engine, where the negative
battery cable attaches.
for more information on the location of the
remote positive (+) and remote negative (−)
terminals.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use
a remote positive (+)
terminal if the
{ CAUTION:
vehicle has one.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the remote negative (−) terminal, on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
How to Check Lubricant
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover, if the
vehicle has one, to its original position.
All-Wheel Drive
(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug
Transfer Case
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If your vehicle is equipped with All-Wheel Drive, be
sure to perform the lubricant checks described in this
section. There are two additional systems that need
lubrication.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
production. They are not filled to reach a certain level.
When checking the fluid level on any axle, variations in
the readings can be caused by factory fill differences
between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume.
Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking
the fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because
fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not
drained back to the sump area. Therefore, a reading
taken five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will
appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has
been stationary for an hour or two. Remember that the
rear axle assembly must be supported to get a true
reading.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
• For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles, the proper level is
from 0.6 inch to 1.6 inches (15 mm to 40 mm) below
the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the rear
axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
• For All-Wheel-Drive vehicles, the proper level is from
0.04 inch to 0.75 inch (1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below
the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the rear
axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should:
What to Use
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall or other flat surface.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall or other flat surface.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other
flat surface.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim
of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment
may be necessary.
• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs
to be adjusted.
• Have the tires properly inflated.
• Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the
vehicle.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to
be adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim:
for more information.
2. Locate the center of
the projector lens of
the low-beam
headlamp.
4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in
Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the center
of the projector lens of the low-beam headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted
to be seen on the flat surface.
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8 Torx®
socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LED Lighting
Bulb Replacement
The vehicle may have LED headlamps. For replacement
of the LED lighting assembly contact your dealer/retailer.
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Back-Up Lamps
To replace this bulb:
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
1. Open the liftgate.
See Power Liftgate
on page 2-14 for more
information.
{ CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to
service any of the system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a
qualified technician service them.
The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After an HID
headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice that
the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Remove the two
screws from the
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.
6. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert the socket
into the taillamp assembly and turn the socket
clockwise into the taillamp assembly until it clicks.
taillamp assembly.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly. When reinstalling,
make sure to line up the pins on the taillamp
assembly with the vehicle. If you do not line up the
pins correctly, you will not be able install the taillamp
assembly properly.
If you need to replace the taillamp, stoplamp, or turn
signal, you will need to see your dealer/retailer for
service.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until you
disengage the inner pins on the taillamp assembly
from the vehicle.
4. Press the release tab, if the bulb socket has one,
and turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
License Plate Lamp
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
License Plate Lamp
Bulb Number
7440
W5W
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps to the molding that is part of the liftgate.
2. Twist and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the molding opening.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
page 7-4.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. To replace the wiper
blade assembly:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the
blade, and turn the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the park
rest position.
4. Replace the wiper blade.
5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest
position.
2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position, so care should be used
when pulling it away from the vehicle.
3. Turn the wiper blade assembly, and pull it off of the
wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in position and push
the blade away from the wiper arm.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
{ CAUTION:
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading the
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your tires are cold. See
22-Inch Tires
If your vehicle has the optional 22-inch
P285/45R22 size tires, they are classified as
touring tires and are designed for on-road use.
The low-profile, wide tread design is not
recommended for off-road driving. See Off-Road
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustration is an example
of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
For more information, see Uniform Tire Quality
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75% as high as it is wide.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 6-62.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 5-33.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 6-70.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the
Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure
to operate effectively.
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
information.
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High-Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
{ CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add
air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P285/45R22 size
tires and you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, set the cold inflation
pressure to 3 psi (20 kPa) above the recommended tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
Label. When you end this high-speed driving, return the
tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
additional information.
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and transmit
the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the
vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
instrument panel cluster.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
on page 3-56.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Loading Information label and its location on your
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air
pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire’s sidewall.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode
and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays
on the DIC screen.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active. The
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 5-33.
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less
of tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires
may not have treadwear
indicators.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.
If it moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and
tire pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the
tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for mud
additional information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
for information on proper tire rotation.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes, brands,
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle
might not handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes, brands, or
types could also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size, brand, and type
tires on all wheels.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level
you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Your vehicle may have a different size spare than
the road tires (those originally installed on your
vehicle). When new, your vehicle included a spare
tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall
diameter as your vehicle’s road tires and wheels,
so it is all right to drive on it. Because this spare
was developed for use on your vehicle, it will not
affect vehicle handling.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading
the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location
on your vehicle.
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
{ CAUTION:
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. It should be noted that
the temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
information.
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash. Use another type of
traction device only if its manufacturer recommends
it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to the vehicle,
drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the device if it is
contacting the vehicle, and do not spin the wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{ CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by
driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
page 3-6.
{ CAUTION:
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is stored under the
storage tray, which is located on the driver’s side trim
panel (over the rear wheelhouse).
2. Remove the wing nut (B) used to retain the tool bag
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Turn the knob (A) on the jack counterclockwise to
release the jack and wheel blocks from the bracket.
Regular Wheelbase shown,
Extended Wheelbase similar.
4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut (C)
counterclockwise.
1. Remove the tray to access the tools by pulling up
on the finger depression under the jack symbol.
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tools you will be using include the following:
To access the spare tire:
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Jack Handle
D. Jack Handle
Extensions
E. Wheel Wrench
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Hoist Shaft Access
Cover/Hole
G. Tire/Wheel Retainer
H. Spare Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
I. Hoist Shaft
D. Jack Handle
Extensions
Access Hole
J. Hoist End of
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Hoist Cable
Extension Tool
K. Spare Tire Lock
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. To reach the hoist shaft access cover (C), you will
first need to remove the hitch cover. Remove it by
turning the two fasteners located at the bottom
of the cover counterclockwise and then pull
the cover down and rotate towards you.
4. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and
wheel wrench (E) as shown.
2. Open the hoist shaft access cover (C) on the
bumper to access the spare tire lock (K).
3. To remove the spare tire lock insert the ignition key,
turn it clockwise and then pull the lock out.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Insert the open end
of the extension (J)
through the hole in the
rear bumper (I) (hoist
shaft access hole).
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
page 6-89 for more information.
7. Use the wheel wrench
hook that allows you
to pull the hoist
cable towards you, to
assist in reaching
the spare tire.
Be sure the hoist end (J) of the extension (D)
connects to the hoist shaft (B). The ribbed square
end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
6. Turn the wheel wrench (E) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire (H) to the ground. Continue
to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the retainer is separated from the pin, tilt the
retainer and pull it through the center of the
wheel along with the cable and latch.
9. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
8. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in
the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer (G).
Separate the retainer from the guide pin by sliding
the retainer up the pin while pressing down on
the latch.
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
2. To remove the center cap, place the chiseled end
of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently pry the cap out.
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.
6-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
Front Position
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of the
vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle and only
one jack handle extension. Attach the wheel wrench
to the jack handle extension. Attach the jack handle
to the jack (A). Position the jack on the frame behind
the flat tire where the frame sections overlap. Turn
the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there
is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground.
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
6. Take off the flat tire.
Rear Position
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the
vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (B) and
both jack handle extensions (C). Attach the wheel
wrench (D) to the jack handle extensions (C). Attach
the jack handle (B) to the jack (A). Use the jacking
pad (E) provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel
wrench (D) clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough
room for the spare tire to clear the ground.
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
8. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the
spare tire.
9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel
is held against the hub.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Tighten the nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown by
turning the wheel
{ CAUTION:
wrench clockwise.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a
torque wrench to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque specification
supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities
equipment wheel nut torque specifications.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the center cap. Line the tab on the back of
the cap with the slot in the wheel. Place the cap on the
wheel and press until it snaps into place.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
page 6-113 for the wheel nut torque specification.
6-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
Secondary Latch System
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible.
If the cable is not
visible proceed
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work,
the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
page 6-92.
to Step 6.
{ CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly and
you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the
instructions listed next.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks
or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
page 6-79.
6-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom edge
of the jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel wrench
to the jack and place it (with the wheel blocks) under
the vehicle toward the front of the rear bumper.
6-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from under the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist end of extension, and wheel wrench into the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel
wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest
of the way.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
14. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging under the vehicle.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place.
The secondary latch has released and the spare
tire is balancing on the jack.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been inspected and/or
replaced.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the
cable.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
6-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Hoist Shaft Access
Cover/Hole
D. Jack Handle
Extensions
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Hoist Cable
H. Spare Tire/Flat
Tire (Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
I. Hoist Shaft
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier.
Access Hole
J. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
K. Spare Tire Lock
G. Tire/Wheel Retainer
6-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to
the rear.
2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle. Separate the
tire/wheel retainer (G) from the guide pin.
Pull the pin through the center of the wheel.
Tilt the retainer down and through the center
wheel opening.
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and
wheel wrench (E) as shown.
6-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Insert the open end
of the extension (J)
through the hole in the
rear bumper (I) (hoist
shaft access hole).
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is fully seated across the underside of
the wheel and centered in the wheel opening.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover.
10. Reinstall the hitch cover.
6-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the tools:
3. Position the jack (E) and wheel blocks (A) in the
driver’s side trim panel over the wheelhouse.
4. Turn the jack knob (G) clockwise until the jack is
secured tight in the mounting bracket. Be sure to
position the holes in the base of the jack onto
the pin in the mounting bracket.
5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to fasten the tool
bag (B) on the stud and turn the wing nut (D)
clockwise to secure.
A. Wheel Blocks
B. Tool Bag with
Jack Tools
C. Retaining Bracket
D. Wing Nut Retaining
Tool Bag
E. Jack
F. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
G. Jack Knob
1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle, and
jack handle extensions) to the tool bag (B).
Regular Wheelbase shown,
Extended Wheelbase similar.
2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and jack (E) together
with the wing nut (F).
6. Return the storage tray to its original stored position.
6-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare Tire
Appearance Care
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h) at the recommended
inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle.
This way, a spare tire will be available in case you need it
again. Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,
because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its
wheel together.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
6-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
6-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and
are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
6-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TEHAMA™ Leather
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
The leather surface on the seat was not designed to be
aggressively cleaned using any commercial product. Use
a well wrung cloth dampened with water to remove dust.
Do not use a wet cloth or saturate the leather surface with
water. Allow the leather to dry naturally. If a soil occurs
that cannot be completely removed, allow it to become
part of the natural markings of the leather. The leather in
the vehicle was designed to have a natural appearance
and develop a more vintage appearance with use.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam to clean
leather. Never use spot lifters or spot removers
on leather. It is very important to not use any commercial
leather cleaners or coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather. Not only are those products
not necessary, they will permanently and adversely
change the appearance and feel of the leather. Never
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior. Never
use shoe polish on leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
6-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wood Panels
Weatherstrips
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Care of Safety Belts
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ CAUTION:
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
6-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
6-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with
glass cleaner.
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you
clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of
vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
6-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because they could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on
the vehicle.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.
Sheet Metal Damage
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes,
could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s/
retailer’s body and paint shop.
6-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underbody Maintenance
Vehicle Identification
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on a
plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
the vehicle’s engine code.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if parts need to be ordered. The label has
the following information:
Windshield Wiper Fuses
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the
overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it
fixed.
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Electrical System
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. If the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool
down period, protecting the circuit until the problem
is fixed or goes away.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by the vehicle’s
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
6-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
The instrument panel fuse
block access door is
located on the driver side
edge of the instrument
panel.
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
6-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Dome Lamps, Driver Side Turn
Signal
5
6
7
Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp
Instrument Panel Back Lighting
Passenger Side Turn Signal,
Stoplamp
Passenger Door Module, Driver
Unlock
8
9
10
11
Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)
Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)
Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted
Stoplamp
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Rear Climate Controls
Power Mirror
Body Control Module (BCM)
Accessory Power Outlets
Interior Lamps
Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)
Rear Seat Entertainment
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist,
Power Liftgate
The vehicle may not use all of the fuses shown.
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
Rear Seats
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
Steering Wheel Controls Backlight
Driver Door Module
20
6-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses
21
22
Usage
Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Rear Wiper
The center instrument panel fuse block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
23
24
Cooled Seats
Driver Seat Module, Remote
Keyless Entry System
Driver Power Door Lock
(Unlock Feature)
Top View
25
26
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Driver Side Power Window Circuit
Breaker
LT DR
Harness
Connector
Usage
LT DR
BODY
BODY
Driver Door Harness Connection
Harness Connector
Harness Connector
Harness
Usage
Connector
BODY 2
BODY 1
BODY 3
Body Harness Connector 2
Body Harness Connector 1
Body Harness Connector 3
6-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
Harness
Connector
Usage
HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3
HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2
HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1
Special Equipment Option Upfitter
Harness Connector
SEO/UPFITTER
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Passenger Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker
Driver Seat Circuit Breaker
Rear Sliding Window
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle. Lift the
cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
6-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Engine Control Module, Throttle
Control
5
6
7
Trailer Brake Controller
Front Washer
8
Oxygen Sensors
9
Antilock Brakes System 2
Trailer Back-up Lamps
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Engine Control Module (Battery)
10
11
12
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Right Side)
13
Transmission Control Module
(Battery)
Vehicle Back-up Lamps
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Air Conditioning Compressor
Oxygen Sensors
Transmission Controls (Ignition)
Fuel Pump
Fuel System Control Module
Headlamp Washer
Rear Windshield Washer
Fuses
Usage
1
Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Electronic Stability Suspension
Control, Automatic Level Control
Exhaust
Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Engine Controls
2
3
4
6-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
44
45
46
47
Usage
Liftgate Release
Airbag System (Battery)
Instrument Panel Cluster
Not Used
Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition)
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Left Side)
Trailer Park Lamps
Driver Side Park Lamps
Passenger Side Park Lamps
Fog Lamps
24
25
26
27
28
29
48
49
Horn
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamps 2
Sunroof
Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent
System
Windshield Wiper
SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Climate Controls (Battery)
Airbag System (Ignition)
Amplifier
Audio System
Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise
Control
50
51
52
Rear Defogger
Heated Mirrors
SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Relay
Climate Controls (Ignition)
Engine Control Module, Secondary
Fuel Pump (Ignition)
30
31
32
33
34
53
54
55
56
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
J-Case Fuses
Usage
57
58
59
60
61
Cooling Fan 1
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Heavy Duty Antilock Braking System
Cooling Fan 2
43
Antilock Brake System 1
6-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Relays
FAN HI
FAN LO
Usage
Cooling Fan High Speed
Cooling Fan Low Speed
Cooling Fan Control
Low-Beam Headlamp
Front Fog Lamps
Air Conditioning Compressor
Starter
62
63
64
65
66
67
Starter
Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)
Left Bussed Electrical Center 1
Electric Running Boards
Heated Windshield Washer System
Transfer Case
Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery
Power)
Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1
Climate Control Blower
Power Liftgate Module
FAN CNTRL
HDLP LO/HID
FOG LAMP
A/C CMPRSR
STRTR
PWR/TRN
FUEL PMP
PRK LAMP
68
Powertrain
Fuel Pump
Parking Lamps
69
70
71
72
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
RUN/CRANK Switched Power
Left Bussed Electrical Center 2
6-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
17.6 qt
6.0 qt†
16.7 L
5.7 L†
Fuel Tank
Regular
Extended
26.0 gal
31.5 gal
6.0 qt
98.4 L
119.2 L
5.7 L
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Replacement)
Transfer Case Fluid
1.5 qt
1.4 L
Wheel Nut Torque
140 lb ft
190 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid after filling.
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
6.2L V8
2
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
6-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
6-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer
for details.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times
a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you
have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, have your dealer/retailer
do these jobs.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
on page 6-5.
To purchase service information, see Service
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
displays, service is required for the vehicle. Have the
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset
the system.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
page 7-15. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
the last service. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 6-18 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
Scheduled Maintenance
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of this
vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service
be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires for inflation pressures
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, the following services, checks, and inspections
are required:
❑ Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
❑ Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid
levels and add fluid as needed.
Control Service.
❑ Perform any needed additional services.
See “Additional Required Services” in this section.
❑ Inspect suspension and steering components.
See footnote (b).
❑ Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
❑ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
❑ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
❑ Visually check for any leaks or damage.
See footnote (j).
❑ Inspect restraint system components.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator
(if equipped). If necessary, replace filter. See Engine
See footnote (e).
❑ Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
❑ Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as
❑ Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear.
page 7-10.
needed.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 6-19.
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Change transfer case fluid (severe
service). See footnotes (m) and (n).
•
•
•
•
•
Change transfer case fluid (normal
service). See footnote (m).
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnotes † and (g).
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 6-54 and Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades on page 6-102 for more information.
# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and
parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints
are maintenance-free.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-95.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including
calipers, parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear
compartment hinges, outer tailgate handle pivot points,
latch bolt, fuel door hinge, and folding seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed
to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(m) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation. Check to be sure vent hose is
unobstructed, clear, and free of debris. During any
maintenance, if a power washer is used to clean mud
and dirt from the underbody, care should be taken to
not directly spray the transfer case output seals.
High pressure water can overcome the seals and
contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the transfer case and should
be replaced.
(g) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
Replace as needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(n) Severe Service: Change transfer case fluid if the
vehicle is mainly used for trailer towing or driven in city
traffic, wet environment, or high ambient temperatures.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 6-25.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle
safety, dependability, and emission control performance.
Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and
services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper
fluid if necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
the spare tire, if the vehicle has one. See Inflation - Tire
check to make sure it is stored securely. See Changing
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 6-69.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-34.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Hood and Liftgate Support Gas Strut
Service
{ CAUTION:
Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, corrosion,
cracks, loss of lubricant, or other damage. Check
the hold open ability of gas strut. If necessary,
replace with genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
Hydraulic Brake
System
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Power Steering
System
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified as synthetic, and should
also be identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use
only oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Engine Oil
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 6-25.
Engine Coolant
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Outer Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Handle Pivot (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Front and
Rear Axle
Points
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Transfer Case
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Synthetic Grease with
Weatherstrip Teflon, Superlube
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Squeaks
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
Tailgate Hinge Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
and Linkage, (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Folding Seats, in Canada 10953474).
and Fuel
Door Hinge
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
15908916
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Oil Filter
A3086C
PF48
89017524
Spark Plugs
12609877
41-985
Wiper Blades
Front – 21.6 in (55.0 cm)
Rear – 11.8 in (30.0 cm)
25877402
25820122
—
—
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and
the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 7-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 7-10 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, call the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre at 1-888-446-2000.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concern
will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we
suggest following Step One first.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to
the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the following
address:
General Motors Participation in the Mediation/
Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after the following the procedure outlined in
Steps One and Two. General Motors of Canada Limited
wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The
program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days.
We believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/cadillac
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• Find Cadillac dealers for service nationwide
• Exclusive privileges and offers
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle
• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Cadillac — www.cadillac.com
Cadillac Merchandise — www.cadillaccollection.com
Help Center — www.cadillac.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
• Contact Us
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canada — Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Customer Assistance Offices
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be
addressed to:
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:
Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for warranty
service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot
be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle
is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated. It is
your responsibility for the repair or replacement of
the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time
without notification.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver
if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same
type of claim is made many times.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of
North America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic route.
Additional travel information is also available. Allow
three weeks for delivery.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,
incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the
5 year/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain
warranty period. Items considered are hotel, meals,
and rental car.
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be
available if you have OnStar®. For security reasons,
the driver must present identification before this
service is given.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner in the United States with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a
Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year.
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each
technician travels with a specially equipped service
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts
and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and
a copy of the repair orders are required. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive payment.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation Program
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid
specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please see
your dealer for the maximum number of days allowed
and the allowance per rental day. Rental reimbursement
must be supported by original receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet
state, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also
be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Program Information
Collision Parts
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repair Facility
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call emergency services for
help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters
have been taken care of. Move the vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger, or you are instructed to move
it by a police officer.
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Give only the necessary information to police and other
parties involved in the crash.
page 8-7.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage
is not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Gather the following information:
• Driver’s name, address, phone number
• Driver’s license number
• Owner’s name, address, phone number
• Vehicle license plate
• Vehicle make, model and model year
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Insurance company and policy number
• General description of the damage to the other
vehicle
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality
replacement parts. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See After
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or
recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation
based on that insurance company’s collision policy
repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can have control of the
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
for more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appearance Care (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 6-53
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
Weatherstrips ............................................ 6-100
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights (cont.)
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors (cont.)
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rearview Mirrors (cont.)
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats (cont.)
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-2
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield (cont.)
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-33
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
